2008 accent manual

274
 2008

Upload: mara-smileyface

Post on 03-Jun-2018

225 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 1/282

 2008

Page 2: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 2/282

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is yourresponsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out

at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operatingconditions are also included in Section 5.

A010A03A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle'sspecific warranty coverage.

Page 3: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 3/282

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time apolicy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptionnations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, yomaterial in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle

OWNER'S MANU

A030A01A-AAT

OperationMaintenance

Specifications

Page 4: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 4/282

F2

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic

systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

!A070A01A-AAT

  CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect theperformance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulationsestablished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Page 5: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 5/282

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

Page 6: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 6/282

F4

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems

that help to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that youexpect. These systems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems andcomponents and help to control their operation. These computerized system operations arewide-ranging and involve components to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate thereadiness of the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag andseat belt pre-tensioner systems should be deployed and then to activate the deployment, andif equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, traction control and electrical stability control to assist

the driver to control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. These systems electronically storeinformation that is useful to service technicians when they need to diagnose and repair thesesystems. Additional information is stored only when a crash occurs that results in thedeployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage is done bydevices called event data recorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as theSupplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), mayrecord some information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. Thisinformation consists of data related to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic informationin the airbag or seat belt systems at the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed thata crash of sufficient severity occurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or shareit with others except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, oro with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

or

o as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, oro as required by law.

Page 7: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 7/282

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive a Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you

receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meetthe specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2007 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor Company.

!

Page 8: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 8/282

F6

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-tomers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not covered

under the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty or any other Hyundaiwarranty. In addition, any damage to or

failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts causedby the installation or failure of an imita-

tion, counterfeit or used salvage part isnot covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts

Logo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

" To find the closest autho

call 1-800-826-CARS "

A100A01L A100A02L

Page 9: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 9/282

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

Page 10: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 10/282

Page 11: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 11/282

 1. Hood Release Lever ................................................... 1-94 2. Front Fog Light Switch (If Installed) ............................ 1-81 3. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) .... 1-79 4. Instrument Cluster ....................................................... 1-60 5. Multi-Function Light Switch......................................... 1-76 6. Horn and Driver's Front Airbag ........................ 1-102, 1-42 7. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch .............................. 1-78 8. Hazard Warning Light Switch ..................................... 1-80

 9. Digital Clock ................................................................ 1-8110. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator ..................... 1-4911. Rear Window Defroster Switch ................................... 1-8012. Audio System (If Installed) ........................................ 1-117

13. Passenger's Front Airbag .................................14. Glove Box ..........................................................15. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If Insta16. Multi Box ............................................................17. Cigarette Lighter ................................................18. Power Outlet .....................................................19. Ashtray ...............................................................20. Shift Lever ..........................................................

21. Parking Brake Lever ..........................................22. Front Drink Holder ............................................23. Trunk Lid Release Lever ..................................24. Fuel Filler Lid Release Lever ............................

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

Page 12: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 12/282

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

F10

High Beam Indicator Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

O/D OFF Indicator

(Automatic transaxle only)

B255A02MC-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be foon page 1-64.

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator Light

Seat Belt Warning Light and Chime

Trunk Lid / Tail Gate Open Warning Ligh

Check Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light

Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator L

(If Installed)

Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) M

Indicator (If Installed)

Page 13: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 13/282

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-4Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4

Theft-Alarm System...................................................... 1-8Window Glass ............................................................ 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-13Seat Belts ................................................................... 1-22Child Restraint System............................................... 1-31Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)  System ...................................................................... 1-41Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-60Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-64Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-73Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-76

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ....................... 1-78Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-84Mirror........................................................................... 1-90Hood Release ............................................................. 1-94Heating and Cooling Control .................................... 1-103Stereo Sound System .............................................. 1-115Audio System ........................................................... 1-117Antenna ..................................................................... 1-144

1

Page 14: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 14/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

!

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

B010A01MC-A

B010A02MC-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alco-hol) may be used in your Hyundai. How-ever, if your engine develops driveabilityproblems, the use of 100% unleaded

gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, oralcohols other than ethanol, should notbe used.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels contain-ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re-duce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use MethanolFuels containing methanol hol) should not be used in yoThis type of fuel can reduceformance and damage comthe fuel system.

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle ranty may not cover damag

system and any performancthat are caused by the use otaining methanol or fuelsMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Buty15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2

!

WARNING:o Do not "top off" after the nozzle au-

tomatically shuts off when refueling.o Tighten the cap until it clicks, other-

wise the " " light will illuminate.o Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.

SO

FEATURES OF Y

Page 15: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 15/282

FEATURES OFEATURES OF Y

BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner AirTo help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help the

engine run cleaner and enhance perfor-mance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1200 Miles (2000Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, youcan contribute to the economical opera-tion and durability of your Hyundai by

observing the following recommenda-tions during the first 1200 miles (2000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/ h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute) be-tween 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the acceleratorpedal fully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to

avoid hard stops.o Don't lug the engine (in other words,don't drive so slowly in too high a gearthat the engine "bucks"-shift to a lowergear).

o Whether going fast or slo

speed from time to time.o Don't let the engine idle l

minutes at one time.o Don't tow a trailer during t

miles (2,000 km) of oper

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 16: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 16/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4 DOOR LOCKS

!

B030B01NF-GAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is recorded on the num-ber tag that came with the keys to yourHyundai. This key number tag should notbe left with the keys but kept in a safeplace, not in the vehicle. The key numbershould also be recorded in a place where

it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if youshould lose your keys, your authorizedHyundai dealer can make new keys if youcan supply the key number.

B030B01MC

B040A01A-AAT

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be

Before you drive away (there are children in the cthat all the doors are sec

and locked so that the dbe opened from the insideensure that the doors opened accidentally. Alsobined with the proper belts, locking the doorsoccupants from being ethe car in case of an ac

o Before opening the door,for and avoid oncoming

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same keyoperates all the locks in your Hyundai.However, because the doors can belocked without a key, carrying a spare keyis recommended in case you accidentallylock one key inside the car.

OMC025001

Page 17: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 17/282

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 18: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 18/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6

!

B040D01MC-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simplyclose the door and push the lock switchto the "LOCK" position.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

passenger's door to the "LOCK" po-sition, all doors can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the redmark on the switch is not visible.

o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even if

the inside lock switch is pushed tothe "LOCK" position.

B040E04A-AAT

CHILD-PROTECTOR REAR DOOR

LOCK (4 Door)

Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.

OMC025006

UNLOCK

LOCK

B040E01MC

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

When the lock mechanism

the rear door cannot be opeinside. Its use is recommeever there are small childreseat.

To engage the child-protectothat the door cannot be ope

inside, move the child-protethe " " position and close thethe lever to the " " positiomal door operation is desire

To open the door from the the outside door handle.

FEATURESO

FEATURES OF Y

Page 19: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 19/282

FEATURES OFEATURES OF Y

!

B040G01MC-AAT

Central Door Locks (If Installed)

The central door locking switch is lo-cated on the driver's armrest. It is oper-ated by depressing the door lock switch.If any door is open when the switch isdepressed to the "LOCK" position, thedoor will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion

of the door lock switch, all vehicledoors will lock.

o When depressing the rear portion ofthe switch, all vehicle doors will un-lock.

B040G02MC

o The driver's door can be opened by

pulling the inside door handle even ifthe front portion of the central doorlocking switch has been depressedto lock the doors.

o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-tiple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lock 

switch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protectthe circuit and prevent damage tosystem components.

o The central door locking is operatedby turning the key in the driver's

door lock toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the in-side door handle, the door can be openedand you may be ejected from the ve-hicle and can be injured or killed.

!

B070F03O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYST(If Installed)

NOTE:This device complies with PFCC rules. Operation is sufollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cainterference. and (2) this daccept any interference reIncluding interference thatundesired operation.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications napproved by the party respcompliance could void thethority to operate the equip

UNLOCKLOCK

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 20: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 20/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8 THEFT-ALARM SYS

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)This system is designed to tection from unauthorized ecar. This system is operatstages: the first is the "Armesecond is the "Alarm" stage,

is the "Disarmed" stage. If tsystem provides an audibleblinking of the turn signal lig

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans-

mitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn

signal light will blink once to indicatethat the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time the driver's doorunlocks, the turn signal light will blink

twice to indicate that the system isdisarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all the doors, pressthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

NOTE:

The transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio stationor an airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Hyundai Dealer.

NOTE:

Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 21: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 21/282

!B070B02MC-A

B070B01MC-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described in the following para-graph.

1) Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood andtrunk lid (4 Door)/tail gate (3 Door) areclosed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, theturn signal lights will blink once to indi-cate that the system is armed.

The system can be armed by locking the

doors with the key from the front doors ortail gate (3 Door). However, the hazardwarning lights are not operated.

NOTE:If any door, trunk lid (4 Door)/tail gate (3Door) or engine hood remains open, the

system will not be armed. If this hap-pens, rearm the system as describedabove.

CAUTION:o Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the car. If the sys-tem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the car, the alarm may beactivated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushingthe "LOCK" button on the transmit-ter, the alarming horn will sound onceto indicate that the system is armed.

LOCK

B070C01MC-AAT

Alarm StageThe alarm will be activated following occurs while the cand the system is armed.

1) Any door, tail gate (3 Do

is opened without using thor the ignition key.2) The trunk lid(4 Door) is o

out using the ignition key3) The engine hood is open

The alarming horn will sound

signal lights will blink continuseconds (This happens 3 timoff the system, unlock the dtransmitter or the ignition ke

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engsystem is armed.

!

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 22: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 22/282

110

B070E02MC-AAT

Replacing the batteryWhen the transmitter's batteget weak, it may take severathe button to lock or unlocReplace the battery as soon

Battery type : CR2032

B070E01MC-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans-mitter.

2. At the same time, the alarming hornwill sound and the turn signal lightswill blink continuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push any buttonon the transmitter or lock/unlock thedoors by turning the key.

B070E02MC-A

B070D01MC-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when thefollowing step is taken:

The doors are unlocked by depressingthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteror unlocked with the ignition key.

After depressing unlock button, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is disarmed.

If any door, trunk lid(4 Door)/tail gate(3Door) or engine hood is not opened within30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

B070D02MC-A

NOTE:

When the system is disarmed with theinterior light switched to "DOOR", theinterior light will illuminate for 30 sec-onds.UNLOCK

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 23: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 23/282

Battery

1KMA2003

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with ablade screwdriver.

2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.

WINDOW GLASS

!

3FDA2015

B050A01A-AAT

To raise or lower the window, turn thewindow regulator handle clockwise orcounterclockwise.

WARNING:

When opening or closing the windows,make sure your passenger's arms,hands and body are safely out of the way.

B060A02MC-AAT

POWER WINDOWS (If In

The power windows operate nition key is in the "ON" positiswitches are located on the drand control the front (4/3 Dowindows (4Door) on both sidhicle. The windows may bedepressing the appropriate wand closed by pulling up thopen the window on the driverthe switch(1) halfway down. moves as long as the switch isfully open the driver's windo

cally, press the switch fully d

4 Door

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 24: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 24/282

112

! WARNING:o Passengers can be inju

head, hands or other botrapped by a closing wways check for obstructraising any window.

o NEVER leave the ignitiovehicle.

o NEVER leave any child in the vehicle. Even children may inadvertentvehicle to move, entaselves in the windows, oinjure themselves or oth

o Do not attempt to operaswitch on the driver's switch on another door directions at the same tidone, the window will st

not be opened or closedOMC025015

NOTE:

The power windows can be operated for30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-tions, or removed from the ignitionswitch. If the front doors are openedduring this 30 second period, the powerwindows can no longer be operated with-

out the ignition key turned to the "ON"position.

In order to prevent operation of the pas-senger front (4/3 Door) and rear windows(4Door), a window lock switch(2) is pro-vided on the armrest of the driver's door.To disable the power windows, press thewindow lock switch. To revert to normaloperation, press the window lock switcha second time.

B060A02MC

In automatic operation, the window will fully

open even if you let go of the switch. To stopat the desired opening, pull up and releasethe switch.

CLOSE

OPEN

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 25: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 25/282

SEATS

B080A01MC-AAT

B080A01MC-A

Driver’s seat

1. Seat forward/rearward lolever

2. Seatback recliner control3. Seat cushion height cont

Front passenger’s seat

4. Seat forward/rearward lolever

5. Seatback recliner control

Rear seats

6. Seatback folding lever (I7. Armrest (If Installed)

4 Door

3 Door

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 26: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 26/282

14

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Ang

To move the seat toward the front or rear,pull the lock release lever upward. Thiswill release the seat on its track so youcan move it forward or rearward to the

desired position.When you find the position you want,release the lever and slide the seat for-ward or rearward on its track until it locksinto the desired position and cannot bemoved further.

OMC025026

! WARNING:After adjusting the seat, alwthat it is securely locked inattempting to move the seareverse without using the llever. Sudden or unexpe

ment of the driver's seat cyou to lose control of the veing in an accident.

B080B03A-AAT

FRONT SEATSAdjusting Seat Forward and Rear-

ward! WARNING:o Never adjust the driver’s seat while

the vehicle is moving. Any suddenor unexpected movement of the seatcould cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle resulting in an accident.Only adjust the driver’s seat whenthe vehicle is stationary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat so

that you can sit as far back as pos-sible from the airbag and still com-fortably reach all controls.

B080A01FC-AAT

ADJUSTABLE SEATS

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 27: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 27/282

To recline the seatback, lean forward to

take your weight off it, then pull up on therecliner control lever at the outside edgeof the seat. Now lean back until the de-sired seatback angle is achieved. To lockthe seatback into position, release therecliner control lever.

! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback in-creases your chance of serious or fatalinjuries in the event of a collision or

sudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips will

slide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driv-ers and passengers should always sitwell back in their seats, properly belted,and with the seatbacks upright.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lowerthe headrest, push it down while press-ing the lock knob. To remove the head-rest, raise it as far as it can go then press

the lock knob while pulling upward. Thisshould only be done when the seat is notoccupied.

B080D02MC

Lock knob

! WARNING:

o For maximum effectivenof an accident, the headbe adjusted so the miheadrest is at the same htop of the occupant's ey

of a cushion that holdaway from the seatbackommended.

o Do not operate the vehiheadrests removed as sto an occupant may oevent of an accident. Hea

provide protection aganeck injuries when prope

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 28: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 28/282

16

B130A01A-AAT

REAR SEAT ENTRY (3 D

The front passenger's seatbe tilted to enter the rear seBy pulling up on the recliner (1) at the outside of the frontseat, the seatback will tilt forwseat will automatically slide

Rear seat occupants can passenger's seatback by defoot lever (2) as shown in th

(2)

! WARNING:

B080F01S-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat only)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward orrearward. To raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion, turn the rear knob

forward or rearward.

B080F01MC

B080G01A-GAT

Adjusting Armrest Angle(Driver's side only)

The armrest will be raised or loweredmanually.To raise the armrest, pull it up.To lower it, press the armrest down.

OMC025031

o Do not adjust the headrest heightwhile the vehicle is in motion.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 29: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 29/282

! WARNING:Passengers sitting in the rear seat shouldbe careful not to accidentally press thefoot lever (2) while the vehicle is moving,as this may cause the seatback to moveforward and injure a front seat occupant.

B085A01MC-GAT

REAR SEAT

Adjusting seatback angle (3 Door)

To recline the seatback, pull up the

seatback folding lever (1) and push theseatback rearward.

B085A01MC

(1)

To return the seatback to an upright po-

sition, pull up the seatback folding lever(1) and pull the seatback forward until theseatback locks into upright position.After adjusting the seatback angle, al-ways check that it is securely locked intoplace.

! WARNING:Do not adjust the seatback angle whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Lock Knob

B085D01TG-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

(If Installed)

B090A01MC

Headrests are designed to

the risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it the headrest, push it down wthe lock knob. To remove traise it as far as it can go thlock knob while pulling ushould only be done when th

occupied.

! WARNING:o For maximum effectiven

of an accident, the headbe adjusted so the miheadrest is at the same htop of the occupant's eyof a cushion that holdaway from the seatbackommended.

o Do not operate the vehiheadrests removed as sto an occupant may oevent of an accident. Heaprovide protection aganeck injuries when prope

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 30: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 30/282

18

o Before folding the seatthe buckle in the pockeprevent the buckle fromaged by seatback.

!

B110A01MC-AAT

Folding Rear Seatbacks (4Door)

The rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or to increasethe luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accom-modated.Never allow passengers to sit on top ofthe folded down seat back while the caris moving as this is not a proper seatingposition and no seat belts are availablefor use. This could result in serious in-jury or death in case of an accident orsudden stop. Objects carried on thefolded down seatback should not extend

higher than the top of the front seats.This could allow cargo to slide forwardand cause injury or damage during sud-den stops.

To fold down the seatback :

1. Slide forward and upright the frontseats before folding down.

2. Lower the headrests to the lowestposition.

B220D05MC

o In order to prevent the center shoul-der belt from being damaged whilefolding the rear seat, disconnect themetal tab (A) from the buckle (B). Todisconnect the metal tab (A) from

the buckle (B) , insert a narrow-endedtool into the groove located on thebuckle(B).

! CAUTION:

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 31: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 31/282

B090A02MC

3. Pull up the seatback locking knob,

then fold the seat toward the front ofthe vehicle.

! CAUTION:

o Move the rear lap/shoulder belt tothe outside so that they don't inter-fere with the seatback when folding.

o Move the rear lap/shou

the side so that it is cseatback when returninright position.

o Place the rear seat belt toposition.

OMC025039

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 32: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 32/282

20

To fold seatback down

cushion up :1. Slide the front seats forwa

the seatbacks upright bethe rear seatback and cu

!

B080G01MC-AAT

Folding Rear Seatback and Seat

Cushion (3 Door)

For greater convenience, the entireseatback may be folded down and theseat cushion may be folded up.

WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rear seatback and the fold-up rear seat cushion isto allow you to carry more objects thancould be accommodated. Do not allow

passengers to sit on the cargo areawhile the car is moving. This is not aproper seating position and no seat beltsare available for use when the seat back is folded down. This could result in seri-ous injury or death in case of an accidentor a sudden stop. Objects should not

extend higher than the top of the frontseatbacks. This could allow cargo toslide forward and cause injury or dam-age during sudden stops.

! WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to its

upright position after being folded down:Be careful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. Do not allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to get caught orpinched in the rear seat. Ensure that theseatback is completely locked into its

upright position by pushing on the top ofthe seatback. Otherwise, in an accidentor sudden stop, the seat could fold downand allow cargo to enter the passengercompartment, which could result in se-rious injury or death.

When you return the seatback to its up-

right position, always be sure it has lockedinto position by pushing on the top of theseatback.

CAUTION:!

o In order to prevent the cder belt from being damfolding the rear seat, dismetal tab (A) from the budisconnect the metal ta

the buckle (B) , insert a natool into the groove locbuckle(B).

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 33: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 33/282

B080G01MC

o Before folding the seatback, insert

the buckle in the pocket. This canprevent the buckle from being dam-aged by seatback.

B090A03MC

2. Pull the strap of the seat cushion up-

ward to fold up the seat cushion.3. Fold up the seat cushion.

4. Remove and put the hea

loops on backside of the s

5. Pull the seatback locking seatback to fold-down the

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

SEAT BELTS

Page 34: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 34/282

22 SEAT BELTS

B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higherthan the top of the seatback. In addition,

do not place objects on the rear shelf asthey may move forward during braking orin an accident and strike vehicle passen-gers.

B140A01MC

!!

B150A02S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIO

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicletheir seat belts at all timesand child restraints reduce

serious or fatal injuries for ain the event of a collision or sWithout a seat belt, occupashifted too close to a deplostrike the interior structure ofrom the vehicle. Properlybelts greatly reduce these hawith advanced airbags, unbpants can be severely injuploying airbag. Always folcautions about seat belts, occupant safety containmanual.

6. Fold down the seat back forward.

B090A06MC

!

When you return the seatback and seatcushion to its original position, always besure it has locked into position by push-ing on the top of the seatback.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback andseat cushion to its original position , becareful not to damage the seat belt web-bing or buckle. In addition, do not allow

the seat belt webbing or buckle to getcaught or pinched in the rear seat.

Page 35: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 35/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 36: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 36/282

24

!

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity of inju-ries in case of an accident.

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint sys-

tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front seats should be in an up-right position when the car is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion if the person is lying down in the rearseat or if the front seat is in a reclined

position.

WARNING:Riding with a reclined screases your chance of serinjuries in the event of a sudden stop. The protecrestraint system (seat belts

is greatly reduced by reclininSeat belts must be snug ahips and chest to work prmore the seatback is reclinedthe chance that an occupaslide under the lap belt causinternal injuries or the occucould strike the shoulder band passengers should alwback in their seats, properlypage 1-26), and with the seright.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance ofinjury in an accident. When a seat belt isused, the lap belt portion should beplaced as low and snugly as possible onthe hips, not across the abdomen. Forspecific recommendations, consult a phy-sician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured PersonA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported. Whenthis is necessary, you should consult aphysician for recommendations.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 37: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 37/282

!

B160A02A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to dam-

age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Besure that the webbing or buckle does notget caught or pinched in the rear seat. Aseat belt with damaged webbing or bucklewill not be as strong and could possiblyfail during a collision or sudden stop,resulting in serious injury.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assemblies shouldbe replaced if the vehicle has been in-volved in an accident. This should bedone even if no damage is visible. Addi-tional questions concerning seat beltoperation should be directed to your

Hyundai Dealer.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can be cleanedby using a mild soap solution and warm

water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents orabrasives should not be used becausethey may damage and weaken the fabric.

B170A02MC-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FR

SHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of belt anchor to one of the 4 maximum comfort and safetIf the height of the adjustingtoo near your neck, you will n

the most effective protectionder portion should be adjustlies across your chest and your shoulder nearest the dyour neck. To adjust the heigbelt anchor, lower or raiseadjuster into an appropriate

raise the height adjuster, p

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or dam-age of any kind. Parts of the system thatare damaged should be replaced as soonas possible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

26

Page 38: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 38/282

26

To fasten your seat belt, pulretractor and insert the metabuckle. There will be an auwhen the tab locks into the

The seat belt automatically aproper length only after theadjusted manually so that around your hips. If you leanslow, easy motion, the beltand let you move around. sudden stop or impact, howewill lock into position. It will altry to lean forward too quick

B180A01MC-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Po

with Emergency Locking

To Fasten Your Belt

o If the shoulder belt anchor is not

moved, grasp the shoulder part ofthe belt and pull forward to the full.

!WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appropri-ate height. Never position the shoul-der belt across your neck or face.Improperly positioned seat belts cancause serious injuries in an acci-

dent.o Failure to replace seat belts after an

accident could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not provideprotection in the event of anothercollision leading to personal injury ordeath. Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident as soon as pos-sible.

To lower it, push it down while pressing

the height adjuster button. Release thebutton to lock the anchor into position. Trysliding the height adjuster to make surethat it has locked into the position.

OMC025042-1

! CAUTION:o Adjust the shoulder belt height whenyou sit well back in the seat.

o When adjusting the shoulder beltheight, grip the height adjuster but-ton securely and slide the height

adjuster up or down.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 39: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 39/282

NOTE:If the seat belt is not fastened when theignition key is turned from the "OFF"position to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning will activate to remind thedriver to fasten the seat belt as follows.

The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-tion.

B265E01MC-AAT

Seat Belt Warning Light

and Chime

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound

Unbuckled

Buckled

Buckled→→→→→ Unbuckled

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

↓Below 3mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds

6 seconds

6 seconds *1)

Stop *2)

6 seconds None

B190A03A-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Pass

Rear Seat 3-Point Systembination Locking Retrac

To Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type sinstalled in the rear seat o

center positions to help acthe installation of child restraHyundai strongly recommendren always be seated in thNEVER place any infant resin the front seat of the vehicThis type of seat belt comb

tures of both an emergencytractor seat belt and an automretractor seat belt. To fastebelt, pull it out of the retractothe metal tab into the bucklbe an audible "click" when t

into the buckle. When not secrestraint, the seat belt opesame way as the driver's seagency Locking Retractor Tymatically adjusts to the propeafter the lap belt portion of thadjusted manually so that

around your hips.

*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withinterval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat

belt is buckled, the light will stop within6 seconds and chime will stop imme-diately.

*2) The light will stop within 6 secondsand chime will stop immediately.

Page 40: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 40/282

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 41: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 41/282

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automati-cally draw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01NF

B220D02MC-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-

Point System With Emergency Lock-ing Retractor

1. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (A) andbuckle (B) are latched together.

B220D01MC

2. After confirming that (A)

latched, pull the seat beretractor and insert the minto the buckle (D).

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

30

Page 42: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 42/282

30

! WARNING:o Never let anyone ride

center seat without fametal tabs and buckles ain this section. This designed to function as

point restraint (lap/shoUsing only the shouldelap portion of the belt cserious or fatal injuries of a collision or sudden

o Never unlock the metalthe buckle (B) with the f

ceptions.(1) In case of folding rea

down.(2) If transporting an o

rear seat may causethe rear seat center

B220D04MC

There will be an audible "click" when the

tab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion,the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or im-

pact, the belt will lock into position. It willalso lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

NOTE:Confirm the metal tab and the bucklemarked "CENTER" are latched together.

B220D03MC

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

CHILD RESTRAINT S

Page 43: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 43/282

!

B220D05MC

To disconnect the metal tab (A) from thebuckle (B), insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle (B).

WARNING:Always lock metal tab (A) into buckle (B)immediately after returning the rearseatbacks to an upright position. Thisportion of the rear center seat belt shouldonly be unbuckled when the rearseatback is folded down.

!

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt,press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:

When fastening the outboard seat beltsor the center seat belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper opera-tion.

B210A01NF

B230A03A-AAT

Children riding in the car shorear seat and must always restrained to minimize the risan accident, sudden stopmaneuver. According to acctics provided by the NationTraffic Safety Administratio

children are safer when strained in the rear seats thaseat. Larger children not instraint should use one of thprovided.All 50 states have child reYou should be aware of thequirements in your state. infant safety seats must be proand installed in the rear seause a commercially availabstraint system that meets the rof the Federal Motor Vehicle

dards (FMVSS).Children could be injured ocrash if their restraints are secured. For small children achild seat or infant seat mu

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

32

Page 44: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 44/282

!o Never hold a child in you

when riding in a vehicleforces created during tear the child from youthrow the child against th

rior.o Never put a seat belt o

and a child. During a crcould press deep into thing serious internal inju

o Never leave children unavehicle – not even for aThe car can heat up vresulting in serious injudren inside. Even verydren may inadvertentlyvehicle to move, entaselves in the windows, o

selves or others inside o Never allow two childrenpersons, to use the sam

o Children often squirm anthemselves improperly.child ride with the shouder their arm or behind

Always properly positionchildren in rear seat.

WARNING:o When the child restraint system is

not in use, store it in the trunk orfasten it with a safety belt so that itwill not be thrown forward in case ofa sudden stop or an accident.

o Children may be seriously injured orkilled by an inflating airbag. All chil-dren, even those too large for childrestraints, must ride in the rear seat.

To reduce the chance or serious or fatalinjuries:

o Children of all ages are safer whenrestrained in the rear seat. A childriding in the front passenger seatcan be forcefully struck by an inflat-ing airbag resulting in serious or fa-tal injuries.

o Always follow the instructions forinstallation and use of the child re-straint maker.

o Always make sure the child seat issecured properly in the car and yourchild is securely restrained in thechild seat.

! WARNING:

WARNING:o A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never installa child or infant seat on the frontpassenger's seat.Should an accident occur and causethe passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infant orchild seat. Thus, only use a childrestraint in the rear seat of yourvehicle.

o Since a safety belt or child restraintsystem can become very hot if it isleft in a closed vehicle, be sure tocheck the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

!

Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seat andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the manufac-turer when installing the child restraintsystem.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 45: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 45/282

! WARNING:o Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floorboard of amoving vehicle. During a collision orsudden stop, the child can be vio-lently thrown against the vehicles

interior, resulting in serious injury.o Never use an infant carrier or a child

safety seat that "hooks" over aseatback, it may not provide ad-equate security in an accident.

o Seat belts can become very hot, es-pecially when the car is parked in

direct sunlight. Always check seatbelt buckles before fastening themover a child.

o Always store or secure a child seat,even when it is not in use. During acollision or sudden stop, the child

seat could be thrown inside the ve-hicle.

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System with

the "Tether Anchorage" System

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat since this can make animportant contribution to safety. Your ve-hicle is provided with three child restrainthook holders for installing the child seat

or infant seat.

B230C02MC-AAT

Installing a Child Restrain

the "Tether Anchorage" (4 Door)

Three child restraint hook located on the rear seat pac

To install the child restr

1. Open the tether anchor crear seat package tray.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

34

Page 46: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 46/282

B230E02MC-AAT

Installing a Child Restrain

the "Tether Anchorage(3 Door)

Three child restraint hook located on the rear floor pa

To install the child restr

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-

stallation and use.o Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

1. Open the tether anchor crear floor panel.

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to the

child restraint hook holder (1) andtighten to secure the seat.

B230C02MC

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 47: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 47/282

B230C02MC

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to the

child restraint hook holder (1) throughthe hole on the covering shelf andtighten to secure the seat.

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-

stallation and use.o Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

B230D06E-AAT

Securing the Child Res

with the "ISOFIX" Syste

Some child seat manufacsafety seats that are labeled ISOFIX-compatible child sseats include two rigid mounted attachments that co

ISOFIX anchors at specific tions in your vehicle. This seat eliminates the need to uto attach the child seat in th

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36

Page 48: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 48/282

The ISOFIX anchors are locathe seatback and the seat curear seat left and right outbpositions.

ISOFIXAnchor

ISOF

Posit!o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-

chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.o When using the vehicle’s "ISOFIX"

system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latched se-

curely in their seat belt buckles andthe seat belt webbing must be re-tracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching andtaking hold of unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates or tabsmay allow the child to reach theunretracted seat belts which mayresult in strangulation and a seriousinjury or death to the child in the childrestraint.

WARNING:

WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.

Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

o Never install a child restraint usingthe ISOFIX anchors at the center po-sition of the rear seat. In a crash, theISOFIX anchors may break if a car

seat is improperly placed in the cen-ter position resulting in serious orfatal injuries. Only place a ISOFIX orISOFIX-compatible child seat in theleft or right out-board rear seatingpositions (as shown) to the appropri-ate ISOFIX anchors provided.

!

ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noISOFIX anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.

Page 49: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 49/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

38

Page 50: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 50/282

B180C02MC-AAT

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is eqdriver's and front passetensioner seat belts. The pupre-tensioner is to make sseat belts fit tightly against thbody in certain frontal collisio

tensioner seat belts can be acor, where the frontal collisioenough, together with the a

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Auto-

matic Locking mode, the child re-straint can move when your vehicleturns or stops suddenly. A child canbe seriously injured or killed if the

child restraint is not properly an-chored to the car, including settingthe retractor to the Automatic Lock-ing mode.

o Do not install any child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur and cause

the passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infant orchild seat. Therefore, only use a childrestraint system in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

o Before installing Child Restraint Sys-tem to vehicles fitted with CurtainAirbags, always refer to safety no-tices for Curtain Airbag systems onthis manual. Whenever installing childrestraints, use only approved devicesand refer to "Child Restraint System"

to ensure correct installation and oc-cupant protection is maximized.

the retractor has engaged the automaticlocking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor isin the automatic locking mode, the beltwill be locked. After installation of thechild restraint system, try to move it in alldirections to be sure the child restraintsystem is securely installed. If you need

to tighten the belt, pull more webbingtoward the retractor. When you unbucklethe seat belt and allow it to retract, theretractor will automatically revert back toits normal seated passenger emergencylocking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint

system, read the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint systemmanufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed, have the system checkedimmediately by your authorizedHyundai dealer.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 51: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 51/282

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into posi-tion. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seatbelt into tighter contact against theoccupant's body.

Passenger'sairbag

B180D01MC

Driver's airbag 1

23

NOTE:o Both the driver's

passenger's pre-tensionwill be activated in cercollisions. The pre-tenbelts can be activatedwhere the frontal collisioenough, together with th

The pre-tensioners will vated if the seat belts arworn at the time of the c

o When the pre-tensioneare activated, a loud noheard and fine dust, whpear to be smoke, may b

the passenger compartmare normal operating conare not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, tmay cause skin irritationnot be breathed for prolods. Wash your hands anoughly after an accident pre-tensioner seat beltsvated.

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

The seat belt must be work correctly andadjusted to the proper position (see

pages 1-25 and 1-26). Please read andfollow all of the important informationand precautions about your vehicle’soccupant safety features – including seatbelts and advanced airbags – that areprovided in this manual.

Page 52: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 52/282

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

Page 53: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 53/282

B240D01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airb3. Side impact airbag4. Curtain airbag

B240D01MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

42

Page 54: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 54/282

B240A01MC

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficient sever-ity. The SRS uses sensors to gather infor-mation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's and

front passenger's seat belt usage andimpact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seattrack position sensors, which are installedon the seat track, determine if the seatsare fore or aft of a reference position. The

seat belt buckle sensors determine if thedriver and front passenger's seat beltsare fastened. These sensors provide theability to control the SRS deploymentbased on how close the driver's seat is tothe steering wheel, how close thepassenger's seat is to the instrumentpanel, whether or not the seat belts arefastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers control the airbag inflation wels. A first stage level is moderate-severity impactsstage level is provided for mimpacts.

According to the impact seve

position and seat belt SRSCM(SRS Control Moduthe airbag inflation. Failurewear seat belts can increasseverity of injury in an accid

Additionally, your Hyundai

with an occupant classificatithe front passenger's seat. Tclassification system detecence of a passenger inpassenger's seat and will turnpassenger's airbag under ctions. For more detail, see "Ocsification System" later in th

B240A02NF-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's Front

Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with an ad-vanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag)System. The indications of the system'spresence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG"embossed on the airbag pad cover in thesteering wheel and the passenger's sidefront panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel above the

glove box.

Driver's Front Airbag

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 55: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 55/282

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the SRS airbagwarning light is connected with the seattrack position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignition

key is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

AIR

BAG

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seat track position sensor and cause the airbagto deploy at a different level thanshould be provided.

o Do not place any objects underneaththe front seats as they could dam-age the seat track position sensor orinterfere with the occupant classifi-cation system.

o Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the front

seat. These may cause a malfunc-tion of the seat track position sen-sor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read inform

the SRS on the labels pthe topside of the sun visglove box (If Installed).

o Advanced airbags are copre-tensioner seat belts vide enhanced occupan

in frontal crashes. Frontnot intended to deploy in which sufficient protecprovided by the pre-tenbelt.

o If you are considering mof your vehicle due to

please contact the Hytomer Assistance Cent633-5151.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44

Page 56: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 56/282

! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as prac-

tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.

o Never sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the front or side airbags.

o Never lean against the door or cen-ter console – always sit in an uprightposition.

o Do not allow an adult passenger toride in the front seat when the “Pas-senger Airbag OFF” indicator is illu-minated, because the airbag will not

deploy in the event of a moderate orsevere frontal crash.

o Never place objects over or nearany airbag module (front or side im-pact airbags), because these objectscan injure passengers in a crash.

o Never place covers, blankets oraftermarket seat warmers on thepassenger seat as these may inter-fere with the occupant classificationsystem.

! WARNING:Always use seat belts and child restraints– every trip, every time, everyone!Airbags inflate with considerable forceand in the blink of an eye. Seat belts helpkeep occupants in proper position toobtain maximum benefit from the airbag.Even with advanced airbags, improp-erly and unbelted occupants can be se-verely injured when the airbag inflates.Always follow the precautions about seatbelts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatalinjuries and receive the maximum safetybenefit from your restraint system:o Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat (seechild restraints 1-31).

o ABC – Always Buckle Children in theback seat. It is the safest place forchildren of any age to ride.

o Front and side impact airbags caninjure occupants improperly posi-tioned in the front seats.

! WARNING:o Do not tamper or disco

wiring or other componecould result from inadverment or failure of the aploy in a crash.

o If the SRS airbag warninpg 1-64) remains illumithe vehicle is being drivauthorized Hyundai deathe airbag system as sosible.

o Airbags can only be u

have an authorized Hyureplace the airbag immedeployment.

o The SRS is designed tofront airbags only when sufficiently severe and wpact angle is within a rasured from the forward axis of the vehicle. The fwill not deploy in side, reaimpacts. Additionally, theonly deploy once. Seat bworn at all times.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 57: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 57/282

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or

near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such object

could cause harm if the vehicle is ina crash severe enough to cause theairbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOTinflate again and will provide no pro-

tection in subsequent collisions.o Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so couldresult in injury, due to accidentaldeployment of the airbags or by ren-dering the SRS inoperative.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the front

seat.

The infant or child couldinjured or killed by an aiment in case of an acci

o Children younger than 1always be properly restr

rear seat. Never allowride in the front passengchild over 13 must be sfront seat, he or she muerly belted and the seamoved as far back as p

o For maximum safety pro

types of crashes, all occluding the driver shouldtheir seat belts whetheairbag is also provided aing position to minimizsevere injury or death ina crash. Do not sit or lesarily close to the airbavehicle is in motion.

! WARNING:! WARNING:

B240A02MC

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

o Front airbags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impactor rollover crashes. In addition, frontairbags will not deploy in frontalcrashes below the deployment

threshold.

o Move your seat as far back as prac-tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbags. Improperly positioned

drivers and passengers can be se-verely injured by inflating airbags.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46

Page 58: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 58/282

B240B02MC-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light

4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat

Track Position Sensors

B240B01NF

10. Driver's and Front PassBelt Buckle Sensors

11. Side Impact Sensor (If In12. Retractor Pre-tensioner 13. Side Impact Airbag Modul14. Curtain Airbag Module (

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should situpright with the seat back in an up-right position, centered on the seat

cushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feeton the floor until the vehicle is parkedand the ignition key is removed.

o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection ina crash. If an occupant is out of

position because of not wearing aseat belt, the airbag may forcefullycontact the occupant causing seri-ous or fatal injuries.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 59: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 59/282

The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-

mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require airbag deploy-ment or pre-tensioner seat belt deploy-ment.

The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about6 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position or after the engine isstarted, after which the "AIRBAG" warn-ing light should go out.

B240B01L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.

The airbag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and in the

front passenger's panel above the glovebox. When the SRSCM detects a suffi-ciently severe impact to the front of thevehicle, it will automatically deploy thefront airbags.

B240B02L

A fully inflated airbag, in coma properly worn seat belt, slow

or the passenger's forwardducing the risk of head and

After complete inflation, the adiately starts deflating, enablto maintain forward visibility

ity to steer or operate other

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48

Page 60: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 60/282

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

o When installing a container of liquidair freshener inside the vehicle, donot place it near the instrument clus-ter nor on the instrument panel sur-face. If there is any leakage from theair freshener onto these areas (in-strument cluster, instrument panel

or air ventilator), it may damage theseparts. If the liquid from the air fresh-ener does leak onto these areas,wash them with water immediately.

WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, the

loud noise followed by released in the vehicle. ditions are normal and aardous - the airbags are

this fine powder. The dusduring airbag deploymenskin or eye irritation as gravate asthma for somAlways wash all exposedthoroughly with lukewarma mild soap after an accid

the airbags were deployo The SRS can function on

ignition key is in the "ONthe SRS "AIRBAG" wadoes not illuminate, or coremains on after illumabout 6 seconds when key is turned to the "ON"after the engine is startedwhile driving, the SRS is properly. If this occursvehicle immediately inyour Hyundai dealer.

Passenger's Front Airbag

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accesso-

ries (drink holder, cassette holder,sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a ve-hicle with a passenger's airbag. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's airbag inflates.

!

B240B01MC-A

Page 61: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 61/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50

This will allow the system tCondition and operation in the front pas

Page 62: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 62/282

When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger tosit properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and their feeton the floor). Restart the engine and havethe person remain in that position forabout 30 seconds.

Proper seating position

B990A01O

This will allow the system tperson and to enable the

airbag. If the "PASSENGER Aindicator is still on, turn the ig"LOCK" and ask the passengerly and restart the engine "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFstill on, ask the passenger to

rear seat.

*1) The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adult

sits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as achild depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. When a largerchild who has outgrown a child re-straint system sits in the front passen-ger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as an adult depending on his/ her physique or posture, or objects inthe lap of the child.

*3) Never install a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat.

Condition and operation in the front pas-senger occupant classification system

Front

passenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Condition

detected by

the occupant

classification

system

1. Adult*1

2. Child*2 or

child restraint

system*3

3. Unoccupied

SRS

warning

light

Off

Off

Off

"PASSEN-

GER AIR

BAG OFF"

indicator light

Off

On

On

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 63: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 63/282

- NEVER put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seat.

B990A08O

! WARNING:o Riding in an improper position or

placing weight on the frontpassenger's seat when it is unoccu-pied by a passenger adversely af-fects the occupant classification

system (OCS).

- NEVER lean on the cen

- NEVER lean on the do- NEVER sit on one side

passenger seat.

- NEVER excessively recline the

front passenger seatback.

- NEVER sit with hips shifted towardsthe front of the seat.

B990A03O

B990A02O

Page 64: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 64/282

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

NOTE:

Page 65: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 65/282

! CAUTION:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the passenger'sfront airbags are connected with theoccupant classification system. If thereis a malfunction of the occupant classi-fication system, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front airbags willinflate in frontal impact crashes even ifthere is no occupant in the front

passenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warn-ing light does not illuminate when theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion, remains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is being

driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system and the SRS airbag systemas soon as possible.

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-

cator illuminates for about 4 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the front pas-senger within approximately 10 secondsafter the ignition is turned on.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle

with the occupation clsystem, never install a chsystem in the front passeA deploying airbag castrike a child resultinginjuries or death. Any chyears of age should rideseat. Children too largrestraints should use thlap/shoulder belts. No type of crash, children of

safer when restrained seat.o If the "PASSENGER AIR

indicator is illuminated wpassenger's seat is occadult and he/she sits pting upright with the sea

upright position, centeredcushion with their seat bcomfortably extended aon the floor), have that pthe rear seat.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54

B990B02MC-AAT

Page 66: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 66/282

Side Impact Airbag (If In

Your Hyundai is equipped impact airbag in each fronpurpose of the airbag is tovehicle's driver and/or the fger with additional protectiooffered by the seat belt alonimpact airbags are designe

only during certain side-impadepending on the crash sevspeed and point of impact. pact airbags are not designin all side impact situations

! WARNING:o If you change the weight on the front

passenger seat just after sit-in orrestart of the engine, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may beturned on or off for a few seconds,

disabling or enabling the passengerairbags. After the initial stage of about30 seconds, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not toggle.

o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-

ket or after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This can ad-versely affect the occupant classifi-cation system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such astools when occupying the front pas-senger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not use accessory seat coverson the front seats.

! WARNING:o Accident statistics show that chil-

dren are safer if they are restrainedin the rear, as opposed to the frontseat. It is recommended that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat,

including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

o Airbags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai dealerreplace the airbag immediately after

deployment.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 67: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 67/282

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supple-

mental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systems andis not a substitute for them. There-fore your seat belts must be worn atall times while the vehicle is in mo-tion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury tothe vehicle occupants.

o For best protection from the sideimpact airbag system and to avoid

being injured by the deploying sideimpact airbag, both front seat occu-pants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's hands should beplaced on the steering wheel at the9:00 and 3:00 positions. The

passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat cov-ers.Use of seat covers could reduce orprevent the effectiveness of the sys-

tem.

!

B990B01MC

Side impact sensor

Important Safety Notes on the Side

Impact Airbag System

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

!o Do not install any accessside or near the side im

o Do not place any objecairbag or between the yourself.

o Do not place any objebrella, bag, etc.) betwedoor and the front seat. Smay become dangerousand cause injury if the suside impact airbag infla

o To prevent unexpected

of the side impact airbaresult in personal injurpact to the side impact sthe ignition key is on.

WARNING:

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56

B990C01JM-GAT

C t i Ai b (If I t ll d)Important Safety Notes for Curtain

Page 68: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 68/282

! WARNING:o The space between the othe curtain airbag musoccupied by children, papets. Occupants shouldout or have any parts oprotruding from the wind

engine is running.o Do not move the sun v

cover the side window ifitem attached to it such door remote control, peneners or the like. These o

cause injury if the Curtadeployed.o Where sun blinds are f

rear doors, these must nor impair the airbag in a

o Do not install any accchildren’s toys in the Cu

deployment zones, as tpair the operation of thethrow parts of them intocabin causing injury to othe system is deployed.

Curtain Airbag (If Installed)

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors. They are designed to helpprotect the heads of the front seat occu-pants and the rear outboard seat occu-pants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to de-ploy only during certain side impact col-lisions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and impact. The curtainairbags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.

B990C01MC

Curtain Airbag

! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints ,

always refer to “Child Restraint Sys-tem” to ensure correct installationand occupant protection is maxi-mized.

o Make sure that the occupant doesnot have any body parts (head, arms& legs) protruding outside the re-straining system. An inflating airbagthat strikes an infant child on thehead could cause serious injury.

o Ensure the opening for the CurtainAirbag System remains unob-structed at all times, so that theairbags can inflate properly if needed.

p y

Airbag Systems

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B240C02NF-AAT

SRS Care

Page 69: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 69/282

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS "AIRBAG"warning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by your Hyundai

dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performedby a qualified Hyundai technician. Im-proper handling of the SRS system may

result in serious personal injury.

HSM393

! WARNING:o To maintain the integrity of the Cur-

tain Airbag system, any work, re-moval or installation of the airbagand associated components (suchas roof lining and side trims) shouldalways be performed by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:o Do not install a child re

tem in the front passengsition.A child restraint systembe placed in the front seaor child could be severelan airbag deployment inaccident.

o Modification to SRS comwiring, including the addkind of badges to the pamodifications to the bod

can adversely affect Smance and lead to posso For cleaning the airbag

use only a soft, dry cwhich has been moistenewater. Solvents or cleaadversely affect the air

and proper deploymenttem.

!

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58

B240D02NF-AAT

Additional Safety Precau

Page 70: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 70/282

Additional Safety Precau

o Never let passengers cargo area (trunk) or ofolded-down back seat. Ashould sit upright, fully bseats with their seat beltsfeet on the floor.

o Passengers should not or change seats while thmoving. A passenger whoing a seat belt during a crgency stop can be throwninside of the vehicle, aoccupants, or out of the v

o Each seat belt is desigstrain one occupant. If mperson uses the same secould be seriously injureda collision.

o Do not use any accessobelts. Devices claiming tocupant comfort or repositbelt can reduce the provided by the seat belt andchance of serious injury

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or

near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such object

could cause harm if the vehicle is ina crash severe enough to cause theairbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so could re-sult in injury, due to accidental infla-tion of the airbags or by renderingthe SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehicle

must be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. YourHyundai dealer knows these precau-tions and can give you the neces-sary information. Failure to followthese precautions and procedures

could increase the risk of personalinjury.

! WARNING:o If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on floor-ing, you shouldn't try to start theengine; have the car towed to anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

o Never hold an infant or child on yourl Th i f t hild ld b i

Adding Equipment to oro Passengers should not place hard orh bj t b t th l

Page 71: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 71/282

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can cause occupants to be shiftedtoo close to a deploying airbag, strikethe interior structure or be thrown

from the vehicle resulting in seriousinjury or death.o Always sit upright with the seatback 

in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with your seat belton, legs comfortably extended andyour feet on the floor.

lap.  The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

Your Airbag-Equipped V

If you modify your vehicle your vehicle's frame, bumper end or side sheet metal or this may affect the operatvehicle's airbag system.

sharp objects between themselves

and the airbags.  Carrying hard orsharp objects on your lap or in yourmouth can result in injuries if an airbaginflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit up-right, fully back in their seats with theirseat belts on and their feet on the floor.If occupants are too close to the airbagcovers, they could be injured if theairbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on ornear the airbag covers.  Any object

attached to or placed on the front orside impact airbag covers could inter-fere with the proper operation of theairbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modi-fication of the front seats could inter-fere with the operation of the supple-

mental restraint system sensing com-ponents or side impact airbags.

o Do not place items under the frontseats.  Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the opera-tion of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components and wiringharnesses.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A02MC-AAT

Type A

Page 72: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 72/282

Type A

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 73: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 73/282

 1. Tachometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights 3. Door Ajar Warning Light 4. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed) 5. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light

(If Installed) 6. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (If Installed)

 7. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

 8. Speedometer 9. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light10. Coolant Temperature Gauge11. Seat Belt Warning Light

12. Charging System Warning Light13. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light14. High Beam Indicator Light15. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light16. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Lig17. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)18. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle

19. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light20. Fuel Gauge21. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed22. Low Fuel Warning Light

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62

B260B02MC-AAT

Type B

Page 74: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 74/282

Type B

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Page 75: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 75/282

12. Door Ajar Warning Light13. Charging System Warning Light14. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Lig15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. High Beam Indicator Light17. Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light18. Fuel Gauge

19. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle20. Low Fuel Warning Light21. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light22. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed

 1. Tachometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights 3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light

(If Installed) 5. Odometer/Trip Odometer 6. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

 7. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 8. Speedometer 9. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light10. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)11. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Malfunction Indicator (If Installed)

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64 WARNING AND INDICATORLIGHTS

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder Indi-B260C01A-AAT

O/D OFF IndicatoB260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

Page 76: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 76/282

!

cator (SRI) (If Installed)When the key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion, the Anti-Lock Brake System SRI willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes onwhile driving, or does not come on when

the key is turned to the "ON" position, thisindicates that there may be a problemwith the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible. The normal braking system will stillbe operational, but without the assis-

tance of the anti-lock brake system.

WARNING:If both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brakefluid level warning lights remain "ON" orcome on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic BrakeForce Distribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

(Automatic TransWhen the overdrive switch the overdrive off indicator wilamber indicator will be illumthe overdrive switch is turne

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indica

Lights

The blinking green arrow oment panel shows the direct

by the turn signals. If the arrobut does not blink, blinks mthan normal, or does not bmalfunction in the turn signindicated. Your dealer shosulted for repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indica

The high beam indicator ligwhenever the headlights arethe high beam or flash pos

g g g

The SRS warning light comes on forapproximately 6 seconds after the key isturned to the "ON" position or after theengine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS isnot working properly. If the AIRBAG warn-ing light does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after operating for about6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started theengine, or if it comes on while driving,

have the SRS inspected by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

Page 77: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 77/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

66

B260J01MC-AAT

Charging System WarningB260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level WaB260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light

Page 78: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 78/282

LightThe charging system warning light shouldcome on when the ignition is turned on,then go out when the engine is running.If the light stays on while the engine isrunning, there is a malfunction in the

electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, have thesystem checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possble.

The low fuel level warning ligwhen the fuel tank is approaWhen it comes on, you shoulsoon as possible. Driving wlevel warning light on or with

below "E" can cause the engand damage the catalytic co

and ChimeThe door ajar warning light warns youthat a door is not completely closed andthe chime warns you that the key is in theignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds when-ever the key is in the ignition switch andthe driver's side front door is open simul-taneously. The chime sounds until thekey is removed from the ignition switchor the driver's side front door is closed.

B260K02A-AAT

Trunk Lid/Tail Gate

Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the trunk lid/ tail gate is completely closed and latched.

B260O01MC-AAT

Check Fuel Filler

ing Light

This warning light indicates cap is not tight securely.Always make sure that the fis tight.

Page 79: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 79/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68

NOTE:If the red engine coolant temperature

B290A01MC-AAT

Engine Coolant TemperatureAvoid hard braking and overthe steering wheel. Inflate th

Page 80: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 80/282

indicator light illuminates, it indicatesoverheating that may damage the en-gine.

Indicator Light(If Installed)

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. The engine coolant is un-der pressure and could erupt and causesevere burns. Wait until the engine iscool before removing the radiator cap.

!

These indicator lights show the tempera-ture of the engine coolant when the igni-

tion switch is ON. Red indicator light illu-minates if the temperature of the enginecoolant is above 253.4±37.4°F(123±3°C). Blue indicator light Illuminatesif the temperature of the engine coolant isbelow 131±37.4°F (55±3°C).If the red indicator light illuminates, pullover and stop as soon as possible andturn off the engine. Then open the hoodand check the coolant level (See "If theengine overheats" on the page 3-4.) andthe water pump drive belt. If you suspectcooling system trouble, have your cool-

ing system checked by a Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

! WARNING:

Significantly low tire presthe vehicle unstable and cato loss of vehicle control anbraking distances.Continued driving on low prwill cause the tires to overh

B260W02JM-AAT

Low Tire Pressure Telltale(If Installed)

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after commingon for about 3 seconds when you turnedthe ignition key to the "ON" position, theTire Pressure Monitoring System is notworking properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized

Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible. If the warninglight illuminates while driving, reduce ve-hicle speed immediately and stop the

vehicle.

proper pressure as indicavehicle’s tire information pla

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B900A01A-AAT

LIGHTS ON WARNING SB265W01MC-AAT

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-

Page 81: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 81/282

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

SOUND

The front disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when newpads are needed. The sound may comeand go or be heard all the time when the

vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed downfirmly. Expensive rotor damage will resultif the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

The warning chime sounds wlights are on and the driver open. This prevents the battcharging by warning you whleft with the tail lights on.sounds until the tail lights ar

!toring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position. If the warning lightdoes not come on, or continuously re-

mains on after comming on for about 3seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working porperly.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.The warning light also comes on andstays on when there is a problem with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealer

as soon as possible.

WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severeand sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-mediately take your foot off the ac-celerator, apply the brakes gradu-

ally and with light force, and slowlymove to a safe position off the road.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREThe needle on the engine cperature gauge should stay i

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01TG-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

Page 82: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 82/282

!

GAUGE (If Installed)

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is un-der pressure and could erupt and cause

severe burns. Wait until the engine iscool before removing the radiator cap.

B290A02MC

range. The normal range is ain the middle between "H" amoves across the dial to "Hover and stop as soon as pturn off the engine. Then opand, after the engine has cothe coolant level and the

drive belt. If you suspect cotrouble, have your coolchecked by a Hyundai dealepossible.

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank.The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.

NOTE:

The " " symbol means the fuel filler

lid is placed on the left side of the vehicle.

B280A02MC-A

Type A Type B

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETERB300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETERYour Hyundai's speedometerin miles per hour (on the oute

Page 83: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 83/282

B310B01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP OD

(Without Trip Computer)

1. Odometer

The odometer records the distance in miles, and is useing a record for maintenancIt is normal for a new vehicle

odometer indicating less tha

The tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute(rpm).

B330A01MC-A

CAUTION:

The engine should not be raced to sucha speed that the needle enters the redzone on the tachometer face. This cancause severe engine damage and mayvoid your warranty.

!

kilometers per hour (on the

B300A03MC-A

B300A02MC-A

Type A Type B Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72

TRIP A: Distance you have your origination po

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-

Type A

Page 84: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 84/282

Pushing in the trip switch for less than 1second when the ignition switch is turned"ON" displays the following sequence:

2. Trip Odometer

OMC025054

B310B02MC-A

B310B03MC-A

destination.TRIP B: Distance from the

tion to the final de

When the trip switch is presthan 1 second, trip odomete0.

eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.

Type B

Trip odometer records the distance of 2trips in miles.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

2. Trip OdometerB310C01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 85: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 85/282

o This mode indicates the drive distancetravelled since the last drive time reset.o Refer to the explanation of the trip

computer (see page 1-74, Tripmeter).

(With Trip Computer)

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total drivingdistance in miles, and is useful for keep-ing a record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have the

odometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-

erage.

B400B03MC-E

Trip Odometer

Odometer

The trip computer is a miccontrolled driver informationdisplays information relatesuch as outside temperaturaverage fuel consumption ato empty on the LCD.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74

TRIP Switch 2. Tripmeter (miles)1. Outside Temperature (°F)

Page 86: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 86/282

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

TRIPMETER

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

Pushing in the TRIP switch for less than

1 second when the ignition switch is in"ON" position changes the display asfollows;

OMC025054

o This mode indicates the ttravelled since the last tripTotal distance is also resthe battery is disconnecte

o Pressing the TRIP switch f1 second when the tripmdisplayed clears the tripm

o The meter's working rang999.9 miles (999.9 kms).

Odometer

Tripmeter

This mode indicates the outside tem-

perature between -40°F (-40°C) and176°F (80°C) .

B400B02MC-E

Odometer

Outside Temperature

Page 87: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 87/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

B340C05A-AAT

Headlight SwitchB340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,

HEADLIGHT AND LOW BEAM

Page 88: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 88/282

To operate the headlights, turnthe end of the multi-function swposition turns on the parkinglights, tail lights and instrumenThe second position turns on th

NOTE:

The ignition must be in the "Oto turn on the headlights.

To indicate a lane change, move thelever up or down to a point where itbegins flashing.The lever will automatically return to thecenter position when released.

B340B01MC

HEADLIGHT AND LOW-BEAMSWITCH

Turn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upward on the lever causes the

turn signals on the right side of the car toblink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the centerposition and turn off the turn signals at thesame time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goeson but does not blink, or does not go onat all, there is a malfunction in the system.Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb orsee your Hyundai dealer.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight FlasherB340D01A-AAT

High-Beam SwitchParking Light Auto Off

o The purpose of this feature is to pre-t th b tt f b i di h d

Page 89: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 89/282

To flash the headlights, pulever toward you, then releheadlights can be flashed the headlight switch is in thetion.

vent the battery from being discharged.The system automatically turns off theheadlights and parking lights whenthe driver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.

o With this feature, the parklight will be

turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch onthe steering column.

To turn on the headlight high beams,push the lever forward (away from you).The High Beam Indicator Light will comeon at the same time. For low beams, pullthe lever back toward you.

OMC025059

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78 WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT B350B01A-AAT

Windshield Washer OperationNOTE:o Do not operate the washe

15 seconds at a time ofl id i i

Page 90: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 90/282

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:

To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removed manu-ally. If there is only a light layer of snowor ice, operate the heater in the defrostmode to melt the snow or ice before

using the wiper.

B350A02MC-A

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel. When the washer lever is oper-ated, the wipers automatically make threepasses across the windshield. The washercontinues to operate until the lever isreleased.

B350B03MC-A

15 seconds at a time ofluid reservoir is empty.o In icy or freezing weath

the wiper blades are not fglass prior to operating

o In areas where water freter, use windshield washe

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired inthe windshield wiper and walever up.

1

2

3

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

INSTRUMENT PANECONTROL (RHEOST

B410A01A-AATB390A01MC-AAT

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

(If Installed)

B350C01MC-GAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Op-

eration

Page 91: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 91/282

The instrument panel lights cbrighter or dimmer by turnin

ment panel light control kno

(If Installed)

B390A02MC-A

1. : The washer fluid will be sprayedonto the rear window and the wiperoperates while the rear windowwiper barrel is placed in this posi-tion.

2.ON : The rear window wiper starts tooperate continuously.

3.OFF

eration

To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the intervalbetween wipes can be varied from ap-proximately 1 to 15 seconds by turningthe interval adjuster barrel (1).

B350C02MC-A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80 HAZARD WARNING SYS-TEM

B370A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side

!

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

B380A01MC-AAT

Page 92: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 92/282

The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. This

causes all turn signal lights to blink. Thehazard warning lights will operate eventhough the key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.

OMC025067

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner sidewindow glass with an abraglass cleaner or use a scmove foreign deposits frosurface of the glass as thisdamage to the defroster el

NOTE:The engine must be runningwindow defroster to operatThe rear window defroster is turned on by

pushing in the switch. To turn the de-froster off, push the switch a second time.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns itself off after about 20 minutes. Torestart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

OMC025072

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

CIGARETTE LIGHTEDIGITAL CLOCK

B420A01A-AATB400A01A-AAT

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360A04A-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 93: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 93/282

For the cigarette lighter to wmust be in the "ACC" position

position.To use the cigarette lighter, pway into its socket. When theheated, the lighter will pop"ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lig

in. This can damage the heaand create a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace lighter, use only a genuine placement or its approved e

There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hourindicated.MIN  - Push "M" to advance the minuteindicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to

":00" to facilitate resetting the clock tothe correct time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00. Pressing"R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29 changesthe readout to 12 : 00.

OMC025098-A

To turn on the front fog lights, push theswitch. They will light when the headlightswitch is in the second position and thekey is in the "ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,

the front fog lights will be turned off.

OMC025062

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82 POWER OUTLET

B500D01TG-GAT

ASHTRAY

B430A01MC-GAT

!CAUTION:o Use when the engine is running and

Page 94: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 94/282

These supply 12V electric power to oper-ate electric accessories or equipment onlywhen the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"position.

OMC025106

To use the ashtray, open thremove the ashtray to empt

pull it all the way out.

CAUTION:o Use when the engine is running andremove a plug from the power outletafter using the electric appliance.Using when the engine stops or leav-ing the electric appliance plugged infor many hours may cause the bat-

tery to discharge.o Do not use the power outlet to con-

nect electric accessories or equip-ment other than those designed tooperate on 12 volts.

o Some electronic devices can causeelectronic interference when plugged

into the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

!WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink

B450B01MC-GAT

REAR DRINK HOLDER (

DRINK HOLDER

B450A02O-AAT

FRONT DRINK HOLDER

Page 95: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 95/282

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that isvery hot can injure you or your pas-sengers. Spilled liquids can damageinterior trim and electrical compo-nents.

o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. Objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the ve-hicle.

!WARNING:Use caution when using the

ers. A spilled beverage thacan injure your passengersuids can damage interior tr

The rear drink holder is locatseat armrest for holding cupThe rear drink holder can pulling the rear seat armres

OMC025108

The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84 SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)

Sun Shade

B460B01MC-GAT

Opening the Sunroof SystemAuto slide open

To use the auto slide featurSLIDE OPEN button on th

Page 96: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 96/282

!

1JBA3110

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or toblock sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driv-ing. This could result in loss of controland an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.

If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof withthe sunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.

OMC025021

!

console for more than 1 ssunroof will slide all the wstop the sunroof sliding at anyany sunroof control button.

Manual slide openPress the SLIDE OPEN buoverhead console for less tond.

Manual slide close

To close the sunroof, press button on the overhead consit until the sunroof is closed

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s hand body are not trapped bsunroof.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console

! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof

B460C01TG-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Page 97: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 97/282

and hold it until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that is

on the sunroof before operating it.

! WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's

hands, arms or body are betweenthe sliding glass and the sunroofsash, as this could result in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms outof the sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other parts

of the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise,you could be seriously injured if thevehicle stops suddenly or if the ve-hicle is involved in an accident.

cold temperature or whered with ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any have accumulated on the

o Do not press any sunr

button longer than neceDamage to the motor or sponents could occur.

Auto tilt upTo use the auto tilt feature, press the TILTUP button on the overhead console formore than 1 second. The sunroof will tiltall the way open. To stop the sunrooftilting at any point, press any sunroofcontrol button.

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

OMC025021

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86

B460D01NF-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically oper-ate:

B460E01TG-GAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battenected or discharged or y

Page 98: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 98/282

ate:

1. Open the sunglass holder.2. Remove the two mounting screws of

the front overhead console with a (+)driver.

OMC025022

nected or discharged, or yemergency handle to operateyou have to reset your sunrofollows:

1. Turn the ignition key to th

tion.2. Press the TILT UP button f

1 second to tilt up the spletely when the sunroof isThen, release the button

3. Press and hold the TILT

once again until the sunturned to the original posUP after it is raised a littlethe maximum TILT UP porelease the button.

4. Press and hold the TILTwithin 5 seconds until th

operated as follows;

TILT DOWN→ SLIDE OPCLOSE

Then, release the button

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench pro-vided with the vehicle into the socket.This wrench can be found in thevehicle's trunk or glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open orcounterclockwise to close the sunroof.

OMC025023

Page 99: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 99/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88

B490A02MC-AAT

Interior Lighto "ON"In the "ON" position, the light stays on at

all times.

SUNGLASS HOLDE

B491A03O-AAT

Page 100: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 100/282

The interior courtesy light switch has threepositions. The three positions are:

o "DOOR"In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened regardless of the ignition keyposition and the light goes out after ap-proximately 20 minutes even though thedoor is open. The light goes out graduallyafter 30 seconds if the door is closed.However if the ignition switch is ON or alldoors are locked, interior light will turn off

even within 30 seconds.

B490A03MC

CAUTION:Do not leave the switch in this positionfor an extended period of time when thevehicle is not running.

!

!

The sunglass holder is locfront overhead console. Pus

the cover to open the sung

WARNING:o Do not keep objects exce

inside the sunglass hold

jects can be thrown fromin the event of a suddenaccident, possibly injursengers in the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglassthe vehicle is moving. Tmirror of the vehicle can

by an open sunglass ho

o "OFF"In the "OFF" position, the light stays off atall times even though a door is open.

Page 101: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 101/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice,d t tt t t b k it f i th

!B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If Installed

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR-ROR

B510A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Page 102: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 102/282

do not attempt to break it free using thecontrol handle or by manipulating theface of the mirror. Use an approvedspray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) torelease the frozen mechanism or move

the vehicle to a warm place and allow theice to melt.

The outside rearview mirrors justed to your preferred reardirectly behind the vehicle,rear of the left and right sideThe remote control outside rror switch controls the adjuboth right and left outside m

The outside rearview mirrors are

equipped with a remote control for yourconvenience. It is operated by the controllever in the bottom front corner of thewindow.Before driving away, always check thatyour mirrors are positioned so you can

see behind you, both to the left and rightsides, as well as directly behind yourvehicle. When using the mirror, alwaysexercise caution when attempting to judgethe distance of vehicles behind or alongside of you.

OMC025049

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B510C01A-AAT

Folding the Outside Rea

rors!WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the passen

To adjust the position of either mir-

ror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the rightor left to activate the adjustable mecha

Page 103: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 103/282

To fold the outside rearview mthem towards the rear. To unside rear view mirrors, push the front.The outside rearview mirrfolded rearward for parking

areas.

tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface. Any ob-jects seen in this mirror are closer thanthey appear.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-

ously for an unnecessary length of

time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face

could cause permanent damage. Toremove any ice, use a sponge, softcloth or approved de-icer.

!

or left to activate the adjustable mecha-nism for the corresponding door mir-ror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate directional switch as illus-

trated.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92 PARKING BRAKEDAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR

B520A01A-AAT B530A03A-AAT

!WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview

mirrorswhile thevehicle ismoving This

Page 104: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 104/282

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/ night inside rearview mirror. The "night"

position is selected by flipping the tab atthe bottom of the mirror toward you. In the"night" position, the glare of headlights ofcars behind you is reduced.

OMC025047

Always engage the parking leaving the car. This also t

parking brake indicator lighkey is in the "ON" or "STARBefore driving away, be sparking brake is fully releaindicator light is off.

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brakthe foot brake and then withthe release button in, pull brake lever up as far as addition it is recommendedparking the vehicle on a grad

lever should be positioned i

mirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, serious injuryor property damage.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

HIGH-MOUNTED REARSTOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT In addition to the lower-mstop lights on either side ofhigh mounted rear stop light of the rear window or insertespoiler also lights when the

4 Door

priate low gear on manual transaxle ve-hicles or in the P (Park) position on auto-matic transaxle vehicles.

!

Page 105: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 105/282

!

spoiler also lights when theapplied.

B550A01MC

B550A01MC-1

3 Door

WARNING:Whenever leaving vehicle or parkingalways set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Ve-hicles not fully engaged in park with theparking brake set are at risk for movinginadvertently and injuring yourself orothers.

CAUTION:Driving with the parking brake appliedwill cause excessive brake pad (or lin-ing) and brake rotor wear.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull the praking brakelever slightly. Secondly, depress the re-

lease button and lower the parking brakelever while holding the button.

!

Page 106: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 106/282

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that

the hood is firmly latched before driv-

B560A02MC-AAT

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

4 Door

Page 107: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 107/282

the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hoodcould fly open while the vehicle isbeing driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in an

accident.o The support rod must be insertedcompletely into the hole provided inthe hood whenever you inspect theengine compartment. This will pre-vent the hood from falling and possi-bly injuring you.

o Do not move the vehicle with thehood in the raised position, as visionis obstructed and the hood could fallor be damaged.

OMC025017

The fuel-filler lid must be opened frominside the vehicle by pulling up on the

fuel-filler lid opener located on the frontfloor area on the left side of the car.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauseice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

3 Door

Page 108: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 108/282

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

! WARNING:- When refueling always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

TRUNK LID/TAIL GATE

B540A01MC-GAT Trunk Lid (4 Door)

o The trunk lid is opened by

the key clockwise to releathen raising the door maT l l th t k li

Page 109: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 109/282

g p p yelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Always insure thatthe engine is OFF before and dur-

ing refueling. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefuel filler cap and door are se-curely closed, before starting theengine.

- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or a

lighter and DO NOT SMOKE orleave a lit cigarette in your vehiclewhile at a gas station especiallyduring refueling. Automotive fuelis highly flammable and can, whenignited, result in explosion by

flames.- If a fire breaks out during refueling,leave the vicinity of the vehicle,and immediately contact the man-ager of the gas station or contactthe police and local fire depart-ment. Follow any safety instruc-

tions they provide.

! WARNING:The trunk lid or the tail gate should al-ways be kept completely closed whilethe vehicle is in motion. If it is left open orajar, poisonous exhaust gases may en-ter the car resulting in serious illiness ordeath to the occupants. See additionalwarnings concerning exhaust gases onpage 2-2.

o To close, lower the trunk lidown on it until it locks. Totrunk lid is securely fastenit up again.

Tail Gate (3 Door)

To open the tail gate, unlockthe key clockwise, then pulhandle toward you.To close, lower the tail gafirmly to engage the latch. gate by turning the key counIf the vehicle is equipped door locking, the tail gate cawithout a key. Push the front central door locking switch the tail gate.

If the tail gate is open whportion of the central door lois pushed, the tail gate wiwhen it is fully closed.

OMC025010

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

B540B02MC-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Lat

(4 Door)! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in

B540D01MC-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

(4 Door)

Page 110: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 110/282

Your vehicle is equipped withe dark emergency trunk rlocated inside the trunk. It wthe trunk is closed. When lever will release the trunk lnism and open the trunk.

motion. If it is left open or ajar, exhaustgases may enter the car and seriousillness may result.

OMC025011

To open the trunk lid without using thekey, pull up the lid release lever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure thetrunk lid is securely fastened, check bytrying to pull it up again.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

! WARNING:o If a person becomes locked in the

trunk, pull the emergency trunk re-lease le er of the inside panel in the

When loading the objects incompartment, use the four rin the luggage compartment luggage net as shown illuswill help prevent the objects

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02O-AAT

(If Installed)

Type A

Page 111: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 111/282

lease lever of the inside panel in thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o Keep cars locked and keys out of thereach of children. HYUNDAI recom-

mends parents teach children aboutthe emergency trunk release leverin their vehicle and how to open thetrunk lid if they are accidentallylocked in the trunk.

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the gvehicle, care should be takerying fragile or bulky objectgage compartment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT the luggage net. ALWAYS

face and body out of its recNOT use when the luggaghave visible signs of wear o

1JBA3113

B540D01MC

Type B

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100 SUN VISOR

B580A02MC-AAT

CARGO AREA COVER

B650A01A-GAT

(3 Door)

Page 112: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 112/282

B580A01MC

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passenger

either frontal or sideward shade. To re-duce glare or to shut out direct rays of thesun, turn the sun visor down.

Ticket holders and vanity mirvided on the back of the sundriver and the front passenger

NOTE:The Supplemental Restra(SRS) label containing usetion can be found on the topvisor.

Nothing should be carried on top of the

luggage cover. Loose materials couldresult in injury to vehicle occupants dur-ing sudden braking.

B650A01MC

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

! WARNING:o Do not place the sun visor in such a

manner that it obscures visibility ofth d t ffi th bj t

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

(If Installed)

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender (If In

Page 113: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 113/282

the roadway, traffic or other objects.o Do not move the sun visor out to

cover the side window if there is anitem attended to it such as a garage

door remote control, pens, air fresh-eners or the like. These objects couldcause injury if the curtain airbag isdeployed.

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

OMC025100 Your vehicle is equipped wextenders that may be usevisor is in the side glass po

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102 STEERING WHEEL TILTLEVER

B600A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

HORN

B610B01L-GAT

Page 114: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 114/282

!

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:

1. Push the lever downward to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to

the desired position.3. After adjustment, securely tighten the

lever by pulling it upward.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle which maycause serious injury or death.

OMC025045 Press the pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

OMC025046

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01TB-GAT

(If Installed)B710B01MC-AAT

Center Ventilator/Side Ve

Page 115: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 115/282

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator B710A01MC

The center ventilators are lomiddle of the dashboard. Thlators are located on each sboard. To change the directflow, move the knob in the cvent up-and-down and sideThe vents are opened wh

knob is moved to " " pvents are closed when the moved to " ". Keep these vany obstructions.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104 HEATING AND VENTILA-TION

B670A02A-GAT

(If Installed)B670B01A-AAT

Fan Speed Control

(Blower Control)

B670C03A-AAT

Air Intake Control

Page 116: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 116/282

1. Temperature control

2. Air conditioning switch (If Installed)3. Air intake control switch4. Air flow control5. Fan speed control

This is used to turn the blower fan on oroff and to select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore thevolume of air delivered from the system,may be controlled manually by setting theblower control between the "1" and "4"

positions.

B670A02MC

B670B01MC This is used to select fresh o

recirculating inside air.

Fresh

Recirculation

With the " " mode selecte

the vehicle from outside andcooled according to the othselected.With the " " mode selecwithin the passenger comdrawn through the heating heated or cooled according

functions selected.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the intake air system in " "

mode will give rise to misting of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment will

B670D04O-AAT

Air Flow Control

Page 117: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 117/282

within the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " "mode selected may result in the air within

the passenger compartment becomingexcessively dry.

This is used to turn the blower fan on/offand to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Five symbols are used torepresent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the

inside of the vehicle faster. The "OFF"mode is used to turn the blower fan off.

B670D09MCFace-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode wto be discharged through thvents.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

Page 118: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 118/282

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face ventsand the floor vents. This makes it possibleto have cooler air from the dashboardvents and warmer air from the floor out-lets at the same time.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

Floor-Defrost Lev

Air is discharged through thdefroster nozzle, the floor defroster nozzle and side vIf the "Floor-Defrost" mode the A/C will turn on autom"Fresh" mode will be activat

B670D03MC B670D04MC

Page 119: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 119/282

Page 120: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 120/282

Page 121: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 121/282

Page 122: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 122/282

Page 123: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 123/282

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hfirst get in, open the windominutes to expel the hot

o When you are using the a

o Set the temperature control to "Cool".("Cool" provides maximum cooling. Thetemperature may be moderated by

moving the control toward "Warm".)o Adjust the fan control to the desired

speed. For greater cooling, turn the fancontrol to one of the higher speeds or

B740C01MC-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

Page 124: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 124/282

ing system, keep all windokeep hot air out.

o When moving slowly, as i

fic, shift to a lower gear.This increases engine speturn increases the speeconditioning compressor

o On steep grades, turn thtioning off to avoid the posengine overheating.

o During winter months owhen the air conditioningregularly, run the air condevery month for a few miThis will help circulate thand keep your system in

ing condition.

control to one of the higher speeds ortemporarily select the ( )positionon the air intake control.

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Push the air conditioning switch. The

air conditioning indicator light shouldcome on at the same time.

o Set the air intake control switch to thefresh air ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed.

o For more rapid action, set the fan atone of the higher speeds.

o Adjust the temperature control to pro-vide the desired amount of warmth.

B740C02MC

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

B720A02E-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

Manual A/C Full automatic A/C Manual A/C Full automatic A/C

Page 125: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 125/282

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (TheA/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will

be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.

o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the wind

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) po

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Freshbe activated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause

on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan sp

to the low position.

B720A01MC-1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

!CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles(15,000 km) or once a year. If the caris being driven in severe conditions

h d t h d

CLIMATE CONTROL AIRFILTER

Outside air

B760A07A-AAT

(For evaporator and blow unit)

Page 126: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 126/282

such as dusty, rough roads, morefrequent climate control air filter in-spections and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased,the system should be checked at anauthorized dealer.

B760A01MC

Inside of

a vehicle

Evaporator core FilterBlower

Inside air

The climate control air filter is located in

front of the evaporator unit behind theglove box.It operates to decrease the amount ofpollutants entering the car.To replace the climate control air filter,refer to the page 6-15.

FEATURES O

FEATURES OF Y

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

MountainsU

 FM radio station

Ionosphere

  FM reception

  AM reception

This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closenessof other strong radio stations or the pres-

ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

Page 127: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 127/282

FM broadcasts are transmfrequencies and do not bendearth's surface. Because of th

casts generally begin to fadistances from the station. Anals are easily affected bmountains, or other obstruccan result in certain listeninwhich might lead you to bellem exists with your radio. Tconditions are normal and doradio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This isbecause AM radio waves are transmittedat low frequencies. These long, low fre-

quency radio waves can follow the curva-ture of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addi-tion, they curve around obstructions sothat they can provide better signal cover-age.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear.

Ionosphere

B750A02L

Buildings

Obstructed area

B750A01L

Iron br

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or

radio

When a cellular phone is usevehicle, noise may be produaudio equipment. This doeth t thi i i

Page 128: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 128/282

o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may be-

gin to play. This is because your radiois designed to lock onto the clearestsignal. If this occurs, select anotherstation with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-nals being received from several di-rections can cause distortion or flutter-ing. This can be caused by a direct andreflected signal from the same station,or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin to fade.

When this occurs, we suggest that youselect another stronger station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering noisesto occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

B750A04L B750A05L

!

that something is wrong wiequipment. In such a case, ular phone at a place as far

from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Hyundai recommends tha

use a cell phone while drivinresult in loss of control, andthat may cause death, serioproperty damage. You musafe place to use a cellular

NOTE:Some states and cities haveprohibiting the use of cell pdriving. You should be awarcific requirements in your a

FEATURES O

1 POWER ON-OFF VOLU

AUDIO SYSTEM

M445A01MC-AAT

STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)

Page 129: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 129/282

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUKnob

2. BAND Select Buttons

3. TUNE/MODE Select Kno4. AUTO SEEK Select Butto5. SCAN Button6. EQ Button7. PRESET STATION Selec

M445A01MC-A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

M445B01MC-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when theignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON” posi-tion. Press the knob to switch the poweron. The LCD shows the radio frequencyin radio mode or displays the CD track in

3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select Knob

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rot

clockwise, while to decrease trotate the knob counterclock

FADER Control

Page 130: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 130/282

in radio mode or displays the CD track inCD mode. To switch the power off, pressthe knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclock-wise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector FM Selection But-ton

Pressing the button changes the FM1and FM2 bands.

AM Selection Button

Pressing the button selects the AMband. AM mode is displayed on LCD.

Pressing the MODE knob changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and

BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting the each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE ControlTo increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

Rotate the control knob clockphasize rear speaker sound (f

sound will be attenuated). Wtrol knob is turned counterclospeaker sound will be emphspeaker sound will be atten

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise toright speaker sound (left spwill be attenuated). When theis turned counterclockwise, sound will be emphasized (rsound will be attenuated).

FM

AM

FEATURES O

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button (Auto-

matic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher fre-quency and when the side is pressed,

7. PRESET STATION Select

Buttons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronicmemory circuit.

o Press the station select buthan two seconds. A seleccator will show in the dis

ing which select button ypressed. The frequency flash after it has been stomemory. You should then

Page 131: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 131/282

it will automatically tune to the next lowerfrequency.

5. SCAN Button

When you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel is re-ceived automatically. To stay on a sta-tion, press the SCAN button again.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODEfor the desired tone quality. Each press ofthe button changes the display as fol-lows;

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be

programmed into the memory of the ra-dio. Then, by simply pressing the AM / FMselect buttons and/or one of the six sta-tion select buttons, you may recall any ofthese stations instantly. To program thestations, follow these steps:

o Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages

audio system. The aumechanism may be damspill them.

o Do not strike or allow impact the audio systemthe system mechanismcur.

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →  OFF

button, and proceed to next desired station. A totions can be programmedone AM and two FM statio

o When completed, any pmay be recalled by selectior FM2 band and the apption button.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

M445C01MC-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)

1. CD Button

Page 132: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 132/282

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Butto3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. CD SCAN Button6. CD EJECT Button7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

M445C01MC-A

Page 133: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 133/282

Page 134: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 134/282

FEATURES O

M455A01MC-GAT

STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)

Page 135: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 135/282

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUMControl Knob

2. AUDIO Select Button3. BAND Select Button4. SCAN Button5. EQ Button

6. AUTO SEEK Select Butto7. TUNE (MANUAL) Select 8. PRESET STATION Selec

M455A01MC-A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

124

M455B01MC-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

o The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the button to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedi i i di i h d

After selecting the each mode, rotate theVolume control knob clockwise or coun-terclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the bass,

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to

right speaker sound. (Left spwill be attenuated) When theis turned counter clockwise,sound will be emphasized (Rsound will be attenuated).

Page 136: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 136/282

direction indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode.

To switch the power off, press thebutton again.o Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 to

turn on that function without pushingPower ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclock-wise to reduce the volume.

2. AUDIO Select Button

Pressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.

clockwise, while to decrease the bass,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

Turn to the left or right for the desiredtreble tone.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to em-

phasize rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

sound will be attenuated).

3. BAND Select Button

Pressing the FM/AM button AM, FM1 and FM2 bandsselected is shown on the di

4. SCAN Button

When you press the button, changed and the next channeautomatically. To stay on a sthe SCAN button again.

FEATURES O

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODEfor the desired tone quality. Each press ofthe button changes the display as fol-lows;

8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-

tively can be preset in the electronicmemory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

S ! CAUTION

o When completed, any pmay be recalled by selector FM2 band and the app

tion button.

Page 137: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 137/282

6. AUTO SEEK Select Button (Auto-

matic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher fre-quency and when the side is pressed,it will automatically tune to the next lowerfrequency.

7. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thefrequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of the ra-

dio. Then, by simply pressing the bandselect button and/or one of the six stationselect buttons, you may recall any ofthese stations instantly. To program thestations, follow these steps:

o Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button for morethan two seconds. Beep sound will beheard while depressing the button. Youshould then release the button, andproceed to program the next desiredstation. A total of 24 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM and

two FM station per button.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages

audio system. The playbnism may be damaged them.

o Do not strike or allow impact the audio systemthe system mechanismcur.

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →  OFF

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

126

M455C01MC-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)

Page 138: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 138/282

M455C01MC-A

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button2. TAPE EJECT Button3. AUTO MUSIC Search (A4. FF/REW Button5. REPEAT (RPT) Button6. DOLBY Button7. EQ Button

FEATURES O

M455D01MC-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

o This allows you to play the reverse

side of the tape by merely depressingthe program button. An arrow will ap-pear in the display to show tape direc-tion.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on that

o Pressing the button will play the be-ginning of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay at

the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

4. FF/REW Button

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise

PLAY, you can reduce this by merely pressing the DOLyou want to cancel the DOpress the button again.

Page 139: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 139/282

o Push the TAPE button to turn on thatfunction without pushing power ON/ 

OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS) But-

ton

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded music

tape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

o Forward tape winding starts when theFF button is pressed during PLAY or

REW mode.o Tape PLAY starts when the FF button

is pressed again during FF mode.o Tape rewinding starts when the REW

button is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.

5. REPEAT (RPT) Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued untilyou push the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to selecSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ andfor the desired tone quality. Ethe button changes the dislows;

NOTE :o To assure proper opera

unit, keep the vehicle iperature within a norm

using the vehicle's air cor heating system.

o When replacing the fuswith a fuse having the pacity.

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

128

o The preset station frequencies areall erased when the car battery isdisconnected. Therefore, all data will

have to be set again if this shouldoccur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away from

! CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-

Page 140: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 140/282

j ythe tape mechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be

used only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure

to keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and tape) towater or excessive moisture.

y p ynism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.

FEATURES O

M455E01MC-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)

- Compatiable with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE

Page 141: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 141/282

M455E01MC-A

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select B2. TRACK UP/DOWN Butto3. FF/REW Button4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. RANDOM (RDM) Button6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Bu7. SCROLL Button

8. EQ Button9. CD EJECT Button10. SCAN Button11. FILE SEARCH Knob  (TUNE Select Knob)12. DIRECTORY SEARCH

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

130

M455F01MC-AAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation or cassette tapeplaying.

o If you press the CD button while a disc

Please refer to the manual of CD-R/ CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information on fi-

nalization process.o Depending on the recording status,

some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

o Playback of MP3, AAC, and WMA file

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward

through the compact disc trahold the FF or REW button.When you release the buttopact disc player will resume

4 REPEAT (RPT) B tt

Page 142: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 142/282

o If you press the CD button while a discis in the CD deck, the CD player will

begin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.o The CD player can be used when the

ignition switch is in either the “ON” or“ACC” position.

o Push the CD button to Start CD play-back without pushing Power ON-OFF

control knob. (Only when a CD is in thedeck.

NOTE :o Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side ofany discs, as it may cause a mal-function.

o The unit can play a multi-sessionCD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.

formats are supported. Load to playtime for these formats may be longer

due to the compressed nature ofthese discs.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

o The desired track on the disc currentlybeing played can be selected usingthe track number.

o Press button once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.

If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe file you are now listening to.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

o To repeat the track you listening to, press the RPTcancel, press it again.

o To repeat the music witfolder, press the RPT butthan 0.8 seconds. To canagain. (MP3 CD only)

o If you do not release RPwhen the track ends, it wcally be replayed.This process will be coyou push the button agapower OFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) Butto

o Press the RDM button tocorded tracks in randomPress RDM again to cancaudio unit OFF then ONdefaults to playing tracks order.

FEATURES O

o To listen the music within the selectedfolder in random order, press the RDMbutton within a second. To cancel,

press it again or or turn the power OFFthen ON. (MP3 CD only)

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating the

7. SCROLL Button

When the CD is playing, you can scroll

through long file names by pressing theDOLBY button for approximately one sec-ond. The file name will appear on theLCD for about three seconds.

8 EQ Button

10. SCAN Button

o To playback the first 10

each track, press the bubeep sound for more thanPress the button again wthe desired track.

o To playback the first 10each track in the selected

Page 143: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 143/282

When the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be

bookmarked by using the MARKbutton.(MP3 CD only)

o Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and

“MEMORY No.” will display for ap-proximately five seconds.To play a bookmarked track, press theMARK button within 0.8 seconds andselect the bookmarked track to play.

o To erase a bookmarked track, press

the MARK button for more than 0.8seconds. The unit will beep oncewhen the bookmark is erased.

8. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODEfor the desired tone quality. Each press ofthe button changes the display as fol-lows;

9. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,

press this button for more than 3 seconds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2 CDsby mistake)

each track in the selected the button within one s

pressed for more than onwill playback the first secotrack in the all folder with Press the button again witond when reached the dthe searching function is rthe track you desired will

the selected folder. (MP

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

o You can skip the track by

FILE SEARCH knob clockwterclockwise.After selecting the desiredthe FILE SEARCH knob the track.If you do not press the FIknob within five seconds

will stop.

CLASSIC→ POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →  OFF

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

132

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH Button

o You can move through the folder by

pushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown ( ).After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackthe selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCH

o Off-road or rough surfacecause the compact discnot use the compact discing in such conditions asthe compact disc face c

o Do not attempt to grabcompact disc out whilebeing pulled into the audi

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-l di th k d t ) t

Page 144: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 144/282

If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the search

will stop.

NOTE :o To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle's air conditioningor heating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnected

or power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.

o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage

to the unit may occur.o Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill

them.o Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.

being pulled into the audiself-loading mechanism

the audio unit and compaoccur.o Avoid using recorded co

in your audio unit. Origindiscs are recommended

cluding the speakers and tape) towater or excessive moisture.

FEATURES O

M465A01MC-AAT

STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (If Installed)

Page 145: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 145/282

M465A01MC-A

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME C2. BAND Select Button3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob4. AUTO SEEK Select Button5. SCAN Button6. EQ Button

7. PRESET Station Select Button

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

134

M465B01MC-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the

ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON” posi-tion. Press the knob to switch the poweron. The LCD shows the radio frequencyin the radio mode, the tape direction indi-cator in the tape mode or CD track in

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE knob changes theBASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting the each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-

FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clocphasize rear speaker sound (fsound will be attenuated). Wtrol knob is turned counterclospeaker sound will be emphspeaker sound will be atten

Page 146: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 146/282

either the CD mode or CD AUTOCHANGER mode. To switch the poweroff, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclock-

wise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Select Button

Pressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thefrequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

mode select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MID,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise toright speaker sound (left spwill be attenuated). When theis turned counterclockwise, sound will be emphasized (rsound will be attenuated).

4. AUTO SEEK Select Bu

matic Channel Selecti

Press the AUTO SEEK seWhen the side is pressedautomatically tune to the nexquency and when the sidit will automatically tune to thfrequency.

FEATURES O

5. SCAN Button

When you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel is receivedautomatically. To stay on a station, pressthe SCAN button again.

6. EQ Button

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of the ra-dio. Then, by simply pressing the AM / FMselect button and/or one of the six stationselect buttons, you may recall any ofthese stations instantly. To program thestations, follow these steps:

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages

o When completed, any pmay be recalled by selector FM2 band and the app

tion button.

Page 147: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 147/282

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODEfor the desired tone quality. Each press ofthe button changes the display as fol-lows;

7. PRESET STATION Select But-

tons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic

memory circuit.

, p

o Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button for morethan two seconds. A select button in-dicator will show in the display indicat-ing which select button you have de-pressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 24 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM station per button.

o Do not place beverages audio system. The aumechanism may be damspill them.

o Do not strike or allow impact the audio systemthe system mechanismcur.

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →  OFF

Page 148: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 148/282

FEATURES O

M465D01MC-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely pressing the pro-gram button. The PLAY and an arrow willappear in the display to show tape direc-tion.

2 TAPE EJECT Button

o Pressing the will start replay at thebeginning of the music just listened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press the

button again.

4. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerably

o If you do not release RPwhen the track ends, it wcally be replayed.

This process will be continupush the button again or turOFF then ON.

7. EQ Button

Page 149: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 149/282

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressedwith a cassette loaded, the cassettewill eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressedduring FF/REW mode, the cassette willeject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS) But-

ton

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs

(must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

o Pressing the will play the begin-ning of the next music segment.

by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If

you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.

5. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts whenthe FF button is pressed during PLAY

or REW mode.o PLAY starts when the FF button is

pressed again during FF mode.o Tape rewinding starts when the REW

button is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o PLAY starts when the REW button

pressed again during REW mode.

6. REPEAT (RPT) Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

Press the EQ button to selec

SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK andfor the desired tone quality. Ethe button changes the dislows;

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything li

the player slot as damagmay occur.

o Do not place beveragesaudio system. The playbnism may be damagedthem.

o Do not strike or allow anpact the audio system, dasystem mechanisms cou

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK →

Page 150: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 150/282

FEATURES O

M465F01MC-AAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc player will accommo-

date up to six compact discs.To insert multiple discs into the player,perform the following:

1. Press and release the LOAD Button.2 Green light on the slot will be illumi-

To insert multiple discs do the followings:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button forone second or more.

You will then hear a beep sound andthe green light on the slot will be illu-minated, and the numbers of emptydisc will blink on the display.

2. After "WAIT" is displayed on the LCDwith the lowest number of empty slot

When you have finished lopress LOAD button to cancefunction or wait for 10 secon

player will begin to play the lasAs each CD starts to play, theber will appear on the displ

NOTE :The disc player takes up to s

Page 151: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 151/282

2. Green light on the slot will be illumi-nated and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display.After "WAIT" is displayed on the LCD,the slot will open with “LOAD” dis-played on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.

When the disc is inserted, the disc willbegin to play automatically.

NOTE :o The disc can be only inserted while

the green light is blinking on the slot.o This CD player is suitable only for 12

cm discs, do not use irregular shapedCDs.

with the lowest number of empty slot

blinking, the slot will open with "LOAD"displayed on the LCD.3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label

side up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbersof the empty disc will blink on thedisplay continuously.

If the next "DISC NO." is displayedwhen the slot is illuminated, you canthen load another disc.

4. Load the remaining disc by followingthe same procedures 1 and 2. Whenyou finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded.

5. To load more than one disc but lessthan six, complete Steps 1 and 2.

The disc player takes up to snot try to load more than si

2. CD Button

o Press the CD Button to sback, during radio operasette tape playing.

o When discs are in the CDpress the CD button, the Cbegin playing even if the sette player is being use

o The CD player can be usignition switch is in either"ACC" position.

o Push the CD button to stback without pushing Powcontrol knob. (Only when adeck).

1

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

140

3. CD EJECT Button

o When the button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.o To eject all of the discs, press thisbutton for one second or more.

4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

o The desired track on the disc currently

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and OFF MODEfor the desired tone quality. Each press ofthe button changes the display as fol-lows;

o To erase a bookmarked the MARK button for moseconds. The unit will

when the bookmark is er

If you want to delete all tracMark Memory, press CD bMark Play mode for more tonds. You will hear a beep s

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →  OFF

Page 152: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 152/282

o The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected usingthe track number.o Press once to skip forward to the

beginning of the next track.o Press once to skip back to the

beginning of the track.

5. DISC Select Buttons

You can instantly select and play a de-sired CD by pressing any of buttons dur-ing play.

6. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you hold downthe FF button continuously, the selectedtrack is advanced. Holding down the REWbutton continuously moves the selectedtrack back.

8. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback thefirst 10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within10 sec. when you have reached the

desired track.

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK button.

o Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.This will display the “ADD(1~20)” sym-bol on the LCD with beep sound.To play the bookmarked tracks, pressthe MARK button within 0.8 seconds.

tracks will be deleted from M

with “DEL ALL” displayed o

NOTE :Tracks stored on Mark Meautomatically erased after ythat contain those tracks.

10. REPEAT (RPT) Butto

o To repeat the track you listening to, press the RPTo cancel, press again.

o To repeat the music wit

CD, press the RPT buttthan 0.8 seconds.To cancel, press it again f0.8 seconds.

o If you do not release RPafter all the tracks are playunit will play back again

track.

FEATURES O

o Do not attempt to grabcompact disc out whilebeing pulled into the audi

self-loading mechanismthe audio unit and compaoccur.

o This equipment is desused only in a 12 volt system with negative gr

11. RANDOM (RDM) Button

With random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order,on all of the discs or on one disc.

To use random, do the following: o Press the RDM button to listen to re-

corded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn the

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

o Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away from

the tape mechanism and head.

Page 153: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 153/282

system with negative gro This unit is made of prec

Do not attempt to disaadjust any parts.

o When driving your vehiclkeep the volume of the enough to allow you to hcoming from the outside

o Do not expose this equcluding the speakers awater or excessive moi

o Avoid using recorded coin your audio unit. Origidiscs are recommended

o The unit is not sure of pla

(Rewritable).

Press RDM again to cancel or turn the

audio unit OFF then ON. The unit de-faults to playing tracks in sequentialorder.

NOTE :o To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle's air conditioningor heating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damageto the unit may occur.o Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.

o Off-road or rough surface driving maycause the compact disc to skip. Donot use the compact disc when driv-ing in such conditions as damage tothe compact disc face could occur.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

142 CARE OF CASSETTTAPES

CARE OF DISCS

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual cases and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingB860A01A-AAT

Page 154: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 154/282

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop

the disc. Hold the disc so you will notleave fingerprints on the surface. If thesurface is scratched, it may cause thepickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affixtape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warpedor cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Wipe the surface clean witha clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen aclean soft cloth in a solution of mild neu-tral detergent to wipe it clean.

Proper care of your cassetextend the tape life and inlistening enjoyment. Always

tapes and cassette cases frolight, severely cold and dustWhen not in use, cassetteways be stored in the origincassette case. When the vehot or cold, allow the interior

to become more comfortabltening to your cassettes.

o Never leave a cassette inplayer when not being could damage the tape plathe cassette tape.

B850A01L

B850A02L

FEATURES O

o The playback head, capstrollers will develop a coaresidue that can result in

of sound quality, such assound. They should bmonthly using a commeable head cleaning tapesolution available from aushops. Follow the supplie

f ll d il

o We strongly recommend against theuse of tapes longer than C-60 (60minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 or

C-180 are very thin and do not performas well in the automotive environment.

o Avoid repeated fast / reverse usage toreplay one given tune or tape section.This can cause poor tape winding to

occur, and eventually cause exces-sive internal drag and poor audio qual-ity in the cassette. If this occurs, it cansometimes be corrected by fast wind-ing the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the prob-lem do not continue to use the tape in

Page 155: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 155/282

carefully and never oil an

tape player unit.o Always be sure that the t

wound on its reel beforethe player. Rotate a pencsprockets to wind up any

o Be sure that the cassette label is notloose or peeling off or tape ejectionmay be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audiotape surfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such aselectric motors, speakers or transform-ers away from your cassette tapes andtape player unit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry placewith the open side facing down to

prevent dust from setting in the cas-sette body.

lem, do not continue to use the tape in

your vehicle.

HLC216

Head

Cottonapplicator

B860A01MC

B860A02L

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

144

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turningone of the hubs with a pencil or yourfinger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,suchasontopof thedashboardor inthe

ANTENNA

B870D01MC-GAT

MICRO ANTENNACAUTION:

o Be sure to fold the micbefore entering a garagheight or installing a caantenna can be folded inposition.

o Before entering an auwash remove by turning

!

Page 156: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 156/282

such as on top of the dashboard or in the

player.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate tempera-ture before putting it in the player.

Your car uses the micro antenna to re-

ceive both AM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is folding and removabletype.

B870D01MC

wash, remove by turning

counterclockwise to prage to the micro antennthe antenna, turn the antwise.

o When reinstalling your aimportant that it is fully tensure proper reception

Engine Exhaust can be Dangerous! ............................. 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3

Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................... 2-6

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 157: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 157/282

p g

Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-9Anti-Lock Brake System ............................................. 2-13Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-14Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-15Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-16

Trailer Towing ............................................................. 2-20Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-20

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and dasphyxiation.

Page 158: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 158/282

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have thesystem checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engingarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an opwith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interiIf you must drive with the trunk lid/ tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speTo assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the ware kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

DRIVIN

!

BEFORE STARTING THEENGINE

C020A02A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you shouldalways:

1. Look around the vehicle to be surethere are no flat tires, puddles of oil orwater or other indications of possibletrouble.

2. After entering the car, check to besure the parking brake is engaged

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety ofautomobile components and parts, in-cluding components found in the inte-rior furnishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm In addi-

!WARNING:

o Always wear approprwhen operating your vehable shoes (high heelsetc.) may interfere with to use the brake and pedal, and the clutch (if

o All passengers must

Page 159: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 159/282

sure the parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights areclean.

4. Check that the interior and exteriormirrors are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and head-rest to be sure they are in their properpositions.

6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that

all other occupants have fastenedtheirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories thatare not needed.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to"ON", check that all appropriate warn-ing lights are operating and that youhave sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lightsand all bulbs when key is in the "ON"position.

defects and reproductive harm. In addi

tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicals knownto the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

o All passengers must

belted whenever the vehing. Refer to pages: 1-231 for more informatioproper use.

o Always check the surreas near your vehicle especially children, befocar into 'drive'.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4

C040A01A-AAT

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

NOTE:Do not hold the key in thposition for more than 15 s

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" ignition is on and all accessoturned on. If the engine is notkey should not be left in the "O

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a

manual transaxle, place the shift leverin neutral and depress the clutch pedalfully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatictransaxle, place the shift lever in "P"(park).

o To start the engine insert the ignition

Page 160: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 160/282

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off orthe key removed from the ignition keycylinder while the vehicle is in motion.The steering wheel is locked by remov-ing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. Itwill crank until you release the key.

!

C040A01E-1

This will discharge the battealso damage the ignition sy

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" poelectrical accessories (radio,

operated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed othis position. To protect agaisteering wheel locks by re

key.

NOTE:If difficulty is experienced inignition key to the START pthe steering wheel right anlease the tension and then t

o To start the engine, insert the ignition

key and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if

the clutch pedal is not depressedfully (Manual Transaxle) or the shiftlever is not in "P" or "N" Position(Automatic Transaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turnedfrom "ACC" position to "LOCK" po-

sition unless the shift lever is in the"P" (Park) position or the negativebattery terminal is disconnectedfrom the battery. (For AutomaticTransaxle)

DRIVIN

C070C01A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition Key

LOCK

ACC

ON

STARTING

C050A01A-AAT

LOCKON

C050B02A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the2. Depress the clutch ped

place the gearshift levtransaxle) in neutral or lever (automatic transaxleposition

Page 161: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 161/282

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"position.

2. Simultaneously push and turn the igni-tion key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

C070C01E-1

START

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed orpoorly ventilated area any longer thanis needed to move your car in or out ofthe area. The carbon monoxide gasemitted is odorless and can cause se-rious injury or death.

C050A01E-1

!

START

position.

3. After turning the ignition"ON" position, make certing lights and gauges areproperly before starting t

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch pressed when starting transaxle vehicle. Youtransaxle equipped vehicstart unless the clutch pe

depressed. On a manuaequipped vehicle that canwithout depressing th

!

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6

!

OPERATING THE MTRANSAXLE

C070A01MC-GAT

!

there is the potential to cause damageto the vehicle or injury to someoneinside or outside the vehicle as a resultof the forward or backward movementof the vehicle that will occur if the clutchis not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.

WARNING: WARNING:Always fully depress the brake pedalbefore and while shifting out of the "P"Park position into another position toavoid inadvertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in or aroundthe car.

Page 162: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 162/282

Your Hyundai's manual trafive forward gears and one rThis shift pattern is also imp

shift knob. The transaxle is fnized in all forward gears seither a higher or a lower gaccomplished.When shifting into reverse gmis-shift prevention tab and verse gear position.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" po-sition and release it when the enginestarts.After the engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 seconds

prior to placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between starting at-tempts to protect the starter from over-heating.

DRIVIN

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever

in neutral for at least 3 seconds afteryour car is completely stopped. Thenmove the lever into the reverse po-sition.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricanthas warmed up. This is normal andnot harmful to the transaxle.

!CAUTION:

o Do not downshift more than 2 gearsor downshift the gear when the en-gine is running at high speed (5,000RPM or higher). Such downshiftingmay damage the engine.

o When downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be taken

C070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be presse

to the floor before shifting, thslowly. Do not rest your foot pedal while driving. This canecessary wear.Do not partially engage the cthe car on an incline. This caessary wear. Use the park

Page 163: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 163/282

o If you've come to a complete stopand it's hard to shift into 1st  orR(Reverse), put the shift lever inN(Neutral) position and release theclutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st  orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as ahandrest during driving, as this canresult in premature wear of thetransaxle shift forks.

not to inadvertently press the gearshift lever sideways in such a man-ner that second gear is engaged.Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to thepoint that the tachometer will enterthe red zone. Such over revving of

the engine may possibly cause en-gine damage.

The shift points as shownrecommended for optimum fand performance.

C070E03A-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT P

essa y ea Use t e pa

hold the car on an incline. Dothe clutch pedal rapidly and

Shiftfrom-to

Recommmph(

15

25

35

45

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

8

!o In the event your vehicl

roadway, do not steer sstead, slow down before into the travel lanes.

o Never exceed posted sp

WARNING:

o Exercise extreme caution when driv-ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.

C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car ingear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. In-stead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down and shift to a lower

Page 164: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 164/282

! WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu-pant.

o Avoid high speeds when corneringor turning.o Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly in-creased if you lose control of your

vehicle at highway speeds.o Loss of control often occurs if two or

more wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenterthe roadway.

g ,

gear. When you do this, engine brak-ing will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross

winds. This gives you much bettercontrol of your car.o Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into reverse.The transaxle can be damaged if youdo not. To shift into reverse, depressthe clutch, move the shift lever to neu-

tral, wait three seconds, then shift tothe reverse position.

DRIVIN

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01A-AAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting

Push the button when shiftingThe selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

For optimum fuel economy, accelerategradually. The transaxle will automati-

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each po

follows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in parking or while starting Whenever parking the car, aping brake and shift the sele

Page 165: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 165/282

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has four forward speeds andone reverse speed. It has a conventionalshift pattern as shown in the illustration.

OMC035014

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" positionwhile the car is moving.

!

cally shift to the second, third and over-drive gears. the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector "P" (Park) position unless tfully stopped. Failure to o

caution will cause severethe transaxle.

!

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

C090H01A-AAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe op

press the brake pedal w

from "Neutral" positionposition to a forward or r

o The ignition key must beposition and the brakedepressed in order to molever from the "P" (Park)

C090F01A-AAT

o 2 (Second gear):

Use for driving on a slippery road, hill

climbing or engine braking downhill. "2"automatically shifts between first andsecond gears.This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear isperformed. However, the shift-up to thirdgear is done when the car speed ex-ceeds a certain value to prevent the en-

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the

car to a complete stop before shifting theselector lever to "R" position.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in

Page 166: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 166/282

any of the other positiono It is always possible to"R", "N", "D", "2", "L" poposition.

C090G01A-AAT

o L (Low gear):

Use for driving up a very steep grade orfor engine braking when descendingsteep hills. When downshifting to "L", thetransaxle will temporarily remain in sec-ond gear until the vehicle has slowedenough for low gear to engage. Do not

exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) in low gear.

gine from over-revving.Manually move the selector to "D" return-ing to normal driving condition.

In the N position, the transaxle is inneutral position, which means that nogears are engaged. The engine can bestarted with the shift lever in "N" position,although this is not recommended exceptif the engine stalls while the car is mov-ing.

C090E02A-AAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. Bring the car to acomplete stop before shifting the selectorto "D" position. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four-gear se-quence. Never downshift manually to "2"position or "L" position when vehiclespeed is more than 60 mph (96 km/h).

DRIVIN

C090I05A-AAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" position

only when the vehicle has completelystopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine in re-verse or any of the forward positionswith the brakes applied.

!o Check the automatic transaxle fluid

level regularly, and add fluid as nec-essary.

o See the maintenance schedule forthe proper fluid recommendation.

C090P01A-AAT

Overdrive Switch

Page 167: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 167/282

o Always apply the footbrake whenshifting from "P" or "N", to "R", "D","2" or "L" position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Alwaysset the parking brake, shift thetransaxle into "P" (Park) position and

turn off the ignition when you leavethe vehicle, even momentarily. Neverleave the vehicle unattended whilethe engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have atendency to roll backwards. Shifting

the shift lever into 2nd gear will helpprevent the vehicle from rolling back-wards.

When the overdrive switch ithe transaxle will automatica

the second, third and overWhen the overdrive switch ithe transaxle will not upshiftdrive gear. For normal drivintor lever should be left in theand the overdrive switch tur

If you need to accelerate rathe accelerator pedal all thefloor. The transaxle will automto a lower gear, depending ospeed and load.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12

WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a c

unbelted occupant is smore likely to be seriouskilled than a properly bpant.

o Avoid high speeds wheor turning.

!o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.

o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-

C090N07A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever

from "P" or "N" to any other positionwith the accelerator pedal depressed.o Never move the gear selector lever

into "P" when the vehicle is in motion.o Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into "R" or"D".

Page 168: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 168/282

o Do not make quick stemovements, such as changes or fast, sharp t

o The risk of rollover iscreased if you lose convehicle at highway spee

o Loss of control often occ

more wheels drop off tand the driver oversteerthe roadway.

o In the event your vehicleroadway, do not steer sstead, slow down before

into the travel lanes.o Never exceed posted sp

pressing and releasing the accelera-tor pedal.o Turn the overdrive switch on for good

fuel economy and smooth driving. Ifengine braking is needed in the "D"range or if repeated upshifting anddownshifting between the 3rd and 4th

gear is needed when climbing a gentleslope, it is recommended that the over-drive switch be turned off. Turn theoverdrive switch back on immediatelyafterward.

o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may be ex-tremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shiftto a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

DRIVIN

!o If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near thevehicle. During the rocking opera-

WARNING: !WARNING:

ABS will not prevent accidimproper or dangerous drivvers. Even though vehicleimproved during emergenalways maintain a safe dtween you and objects ahespeeds should always be r

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYS-TEM

C120A01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is

designed to prevent wheel lock-up dur-ing sudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module moni-tors the wheel speed and controls thepressure applied to each brake. Thus, inemergency situations or on slick roads,ABS will increase vehicle control during

Page 169: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 169/282

tion the vehicle may suddenly moveforward of backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury to nearbypeople or damage to objects.

ing extreme road conditionThe braking distance for cawith an anti-lock braking sbe longer than for those witfollowing road conditions.During these conditionsshould be driven at reduce

o Rough, gravel or snoroads.

o With tire chains installeo On roads where the roa

pitted or has different su

These roads should be dduced speeds. The safetyan ABS equipped vehicle shtested by high speed drivining. This could endanger tyourself or others.

braking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.

o During ABS operation, a slight pulsa-tion may be felt in the brake pedalwhen the brakes are applied. Also, a

noise may be heard in the enginecompartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicatethat the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.

Page 170: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 170/282

Page 171: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 171/282

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16 WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather cwinter result in greater weaproblems. To minimize the winter driving, you should suggestions:

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (and notin traffic), turn off your engine andrestart only when you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does notrequire extended warm-up. After theengine has started, allow the engine to

f 10 t 20 d i t l

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-ners, especially when roads are wet. Ide-ally, corners should always be takenunder gentle acceleration. If you followthese suggestions, tire wear will be heldto a minimum.

Page 172: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 172/282

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-ing the vehicle in gear. In very coldweather, however, give your engine aslightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in toohigh a gear resulting in the engine

bucking. If this happens, shift to a lowergear. Over-revving is racing the en-gine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommend-ed speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system is oper-ated by engine power so your fueleconomy is reduced when you use it.

DRIVIN

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol

Coolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qual-ity ethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubri-cates the water pump and prevents freez-ing. Be sure to replace or replenish your

coolant in accordance with the mainte

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tires or toinstall tire chains on your tires. If snowtires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and type to theoriginal equipment tires. Failure to do somay adversely affect the safety and han-dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,

rapid acceleration sudden brake appli

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weigh

Necessary

In some climates it is recoma lower viscosity "winter wused during cold weather. Sfor recommendations. If youwhat weight oil you should your Hyundai dealer.

Page 173: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 173/282

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in Section6. The level of charge in your battery canbe checked by your Hyundai dealer or aservice station.

coolant in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in Section 5. Before win-ter, have your coolant tested to assurethat its freezing point is sufficient for thetemperatures anticipated during the win-ter.

rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-cations, and sharp turns are potentiallyvery hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-cations on snowy or icy roads may causeskids to occur. You need to keep suffi-cient distance between the vehicle inoperation in front and your vehicle. Also,apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire willprovide a greater driving force, but willnot prevent side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and I

System

Inspect your spark plugs as

Section 6 and replace them Also check all ignition wiringnents to be sure they are worn or damaged in any wa

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipm

Depending on the severity of

where you drive your car, carry appropriate emergencySome of the items you may winclude tire chains, tow strapflashlight, emergency flareshovel, jumper cables, a windgloves, ground cloth, coveral

etc

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozeninternally, you may be able to thaw it outby using a heated key. Handle the heatedkey with care to avoid injury.

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake

can freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes arewet. If you think the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily whileyou put the gear selector lever in "P"

(automatic) or in first or reverse gear

Page 174: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 174/282

etc.

C160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Win-

dow Washer System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedanti-freeze solution in accordance withinstructions on the container. Windowwasher anti-freeze is available fromHyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant or

other types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the finish.

(automatic) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Then re-lease the parking brake.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate

Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the car to be sure the move-ment of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

DRIVIN

!

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularlyoperation and always keep When driving during the day of poor visibility, it is helpful headlights on low beam. Tyou to be seen, as well as t

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:

Adjust the tire inflation pressures for high-way driving. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-outtires can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, collisions, injury, and evendeath. Worn-out tires should be re-placed as soon as possible andshould never be used for driving.

Always check tire tread before driv-i R f t 8 12 f f th

WARNING:

Page 175: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 175/282

!

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire infla-tion pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

can cause poor handling, loss of ve-hicle control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. Always check tires are

properly inflated before driving. Referto pages 2-20 and 8-3 for proper tirepressures and further information.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both engine coolant and engineoil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.

Always check tire tread before driv-ing your car. Refer to 8-12 for furtherinformation and tread limits.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20 TRAILER TOWING

C190A01A-AAT

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01MC-AAT

Tire and Loading Information LabelType A

Type C

Page 176: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 176/282

Your Hyundai should not be used to towa trailer. It is designed to be compact andlight for good fuel economy, and is not

designed as a trailer-towing vehicle.Damages or malfunctions caused by tow-ing may not be covered by the limitedwarranties applying to your Hyundai.Damages or malfunctions that result fromtowing a trailer for commercial purposesare specifically not covered by Hyundai

limited warranties.

C190A01MC

C190F01MC-1

C190F01MC-2

Type B

Type D

DRIVIN

Steps for Determining Co

Limit

(1)Locate the statement

bined weight of occupantshould never exceed XXon your vehicle's placar

(2)Determine the combinethe driver and passeng

be riding in your vehicle

(3)Subtract the combined w

The tire label located on the driver's

side of the center pillar outer panel

gives the original tire size, cold tire

pressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacity

weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

849 lbs (385 kg)

However the seating capacity may be

reduced based upon the weight of all

of the occupants, and the weight of the

cargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includ-

ing occupants and cargo, the vehicle

can carry.

Towingcapacity:

Page 177: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 177/282

(3)Subtract the combined w

driver and passengers

kilograms or XXX poun

(4)The resulting figure equa

able amount of cargo a

load capacity. For exa"XXX" amount equals 14

there will be five 150 lb.

in your vehicle, the amo

able cargo and luggage ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750

650 lbs.)

849 lbs (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total: 5 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,

Rear seat: 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-

ber of occupants including a driver,

your vehicle may carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this ve-

hicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on theweight and the number of occupants

and the tongue load, if your vehicle is

equipped with a trailer.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

Example 1

A B C

(5)Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

Example 2

Page 178: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 178/282

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(489 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

CAUTION:We do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.

!

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weig

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B

DRIVIN

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance LabelRefer to your vehicle’s tire and loading

information label for specific informa-

tion about your vehicle’s capacity

weight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceed your

vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 3

C

Page 179: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 179/282

The compliance label is loc

driver's side of the center

panel.

The label shows the maxi

able weight of the fully load

This is called the GVWR hicle Weight Rating). The

cludes the weight of the occupants, fuel and cargo

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

A B C

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

24

!WARNING:

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR

and vehicle capacity weight. If

you do, parts, including tires on

your vehicle can break, and it can

change the way your vehicle

This label also tells you the maximum

weights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rear

axles, you need to go to a weigh

station and weigh your vehicle. Yourdealer can help you with this. Be sure

to spread out your load equally on the

left and right sides of the centerline.

!WARNING:

o Overloading your vecause heat buildup

vehicle's tires and pofailure that could lead

o Overloading your vecause increased sto

tances that could lead

Page 180: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 180/282

g y yhandles and braking ability. This

could cause you to lose control

and crash. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

!

g

WARNING:

o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-

pacity weight. Exceeding theseratings can cause an accident or

vehicle damage. You can calcu-

late the weight of your load by

weighing the items (or people)before putting them in the ve-hicle. Be careful not to overload

your vehicle.

o A crash resulting from

dling vehicle damage,

or increased sto

tances could result

injury or death.

DRIVIN

NOTE:

o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-

ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight

ratings. Ask your dealer to help

you load your vehicle the right

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in a

sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

Page 181: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 181/282

y y g

way.

The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment

your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

– like suitcases, tools, packages, or

anything else – they move as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or

turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theitems will keep going and can cause

an injury if they strike the driver or a

passenger.

g yo Never stack items, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle above the tops

of the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint in your vehicle.o When you carry something in-

side the vehicle, secure it.o Do not drive with a seat folded

down unless necessary.

If the Engine Will Not Start ........................................... 3-2Jump Starting................................................................ 3-3

If the Engine Overheats ............................................... 3-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................... 3-5

Spare Tire ................................................................... 3-10

If You Have a Flat Tire ............................................... 3-11Changing a Flat Tire 3-12

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3

Page 182: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 182/282

Changing a Flat Tire ................................................... 3 12

If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................. 3-16

Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-18

If You Lose Your Keys ............................................... 3-20 3

32

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOTSTART

!

D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns

Over Slowly

D010A01A-AAT D010C01A-AAT

If Engine Turns Over No

Does Not StartWARNING:

If the engine will not start, do not pushor pull the car to start it. This couldresult in a collision or cause other dam-age. In addition, push or pull startingmay cause the catalytic converter tobe overloaded and create a fire hazard.

Page 183: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 183/282

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the key in the "OFcheck all connectors at and spark plugs. Reconnmay be disconnected or

3. Check the fuel line in the e4. If the engine still refuses t

Hyundai dealer or seek otassistance.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,

be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"or "P" and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operate thestarter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to startit. See instructions for "Jump Starting".

OMC055018

WHAT TO DO IN

JUMP STARTING

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-ing a straight line. Move cautiously offthe road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

D020A02A-AAT o If you should accidentallyyour skin or in your eyes, remove any contaminaand flush the area with cl

at least 15 minutes. Thobtain medical attention. be transported to an emeity, continue to apply watfected area with a spong

o The gas produced by theing the jump-start operatexplosive. Do not smoke

Page 184: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 184/282

! WARNING:

The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly ex-plosive. If these instructions are notfollowed exactly, serious personal in-jury and damage to the vehicle mayoccur! If you are not sure how to followthis procedure, seek qualified assis-

tance. Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wearprotective glasses and be careful not toget acid on yourself, your clothing or onthe car.

D020A02MC

spark or open flame in tho The battery being used to

 jump start must be 12-volnot determine that it is atery, do not attempt to u

 jump start.o To jump start a car with a

battery, follow this proced

1. If the booster battery isanother vehicle, be sure hicles are not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories in both vehic

34

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVER

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indheating, you experience a loor hear loud pinging or k

engine is probably too hot.pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stopit is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector

(automatic), or neutrtransaxle) and set the par

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cablein the exact location shown on theprevious page. First, attach one clampof the jumper cable to the positive (+)

post or cable of the discharged battery.Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cableof the booster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to thenegative (-) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Then attach the other end ofthat cable to a solid metal part of the

i f th b tt D t

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery be-

came discharged (because the lights wereleft on, etc.), have the charging systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer.

Page 185: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 185/282

the air conditioner is on, 3. If coolant is running out u

or steam is coming out frostop the engine. Do not opuntil the coolant has stop

or the steaming has stoppno visible loss of coolant aleave the engine running be sure the engine coolinerating. If the fan is not the engine off.

engine away from the battery. Do notconnect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a fewminutes. This will help to assure that

the booster battery is fully charged.During the jumping operation, run theengine in this vehicle at about 2000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the engine

starts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fastidle or about 2000 rpm for severalminutes.

WHAT TO DO IN

!

!

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drivebelt seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator, hosesor under the car. (If the air conditionerhad been in use, it is normal for coldwater to be draining from it when youstop).

WARNING:

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. This may allow cool-ant to be blown out of the opening andcause serious burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal. Then,

if coolant has been lost, carefully addwater to the reservoir (Page 6-7) to

TIRE PRESSURE MOING SYSTEM (TPMS

C320A01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 186: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 186/282

!While the engine is running, keep hands,long hair and clothing away from mov-ing parts such as the fan and drive beltsto prevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor coolant is leaking out, stop the en-gine immediately and call the nearestHyundai dealer for assistance. !

water to the reservoir (Page 6-7) tobring the fluid level in the reservoir upto the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, call a Hyundaidealer for assistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates thereis a leak in the cooling system and this

should be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.

➀ Low Tire Pressure Tellt➁ TPMS Malfunction Indic

Each tire, including the spvided), should be checkwhen cold and inflated to pressure recommended bymanufacturer on the vehicl

tire inflation pressure labvehicle has tires of a dithan the size indicated onplacard or tire inflation preyou should determine theinflation pressure for thos

36

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

Low Tire Pressu

When the tire pressure mo

tem warning telltale is illumor more of your tires is under-inflated.Immediately reduce your shard cornering and anticipastopping distances. You s

and check your tires as sosible. Inflate the tires to

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure tell-tale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-i fl t d ti th ti t h t

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is provided by a separatetelltale, which displays the symbol"TPMS" when illuminated. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

i t f i l di th i t l

Page 187: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 187/282

pressure as indicated on tplacard or tire inflation prelocated on the driver’s spillar outer panel. If you ca

a service station or if the hold the newly added air, low pressure tire with thespare tire. Then the TPMtion indicator or the Low Titelltale may turn on after re

about 20 minutes of continubefore you have the low-prepaired and replaced on

inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

variety of reasons, including the instal-lation of replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

WHAT TO DO IN

!CAUTION:

In winter or cold weather, the low

tire pressure telltale may be illumi-nated if the tire pressure was ad-justed to the recommended tire in-flation pressure in warm weather. Itdoes not mean your TPMS is mal-functioning because the decreased

temperature leads to a proportionallowering of tire pressure.

WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and cancontribute to loss of vehicle controland increased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail.

!Rear Right tire is under-ilow tire pressure telltale mathe same time as the TPMtion indicator. Have thchecked by an authorizedealer as soon as possibmine the cause of the pro

NOTE:o The TPMS malfunctio

may be illuminated if thmoving around electric

Page 188: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 188/282

lowering of tire pressure.When you drive your vehicle from awarm area to a cold area or from acold area to a warm area, or theoutside temperature is greatly

higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and ad-just the tires to the recommendedtire inflation pressure.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System) Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator comeson and stays on when there is aproblem with the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System. If the system is able tocorrectly detect an under-inflation warn-

ing at the same time as system failurethen it will illuminate both the TPMSmalfunction and the low tire pressuretelltale e.g. if Front Left sensor fails,the TPMS malfunction indicator turnson, but if Front Right, Rear Left, or

moving around electric ply cables or radio trsuch as police stationment and public officcasting stations, militations, airports, or transmers, etc. which can intnormal operation of thesure Monitoring Syste

o The TPMS malfunctiomay be illuminated if snor some electronic devas notebook computerin the vehicle. This cawith normal operationPressure Monitorin(TPMS).

38

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

o If there is a failed tire sensor, it ispossible for the TPMS to tempo-rarily learn a replacement sensorif closely driven to another ve-hicle that is also equipped withTPMS. In rare cases, this maytemporarily delay the TPMS mal-function indicator from turningon.

Changing a tire with TPMS

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always have yourtires serviced by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible.After you replace the low pressure tirewith the spare tire, the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may illuminate after restartingand about 20 minutes of continuous

Please note that a tire thatbeing driven) will have a hsure measurement than acold (from sitting stationary3 hours and driven less during that 3 hour periodtire to cool before measurition pressure.Always be sure the tire is inflating to the recommesure.A cold tire means the vehic

Page 189: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 189/282

If you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Have theflat tire repaired by an authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible or

replace the flat tire with the temporaryspare tire.

NOTE:NEVER use a puncture-repairing agentto repair and/or inflate a low pressure

tire. If used, you will have to replace thetire pressure sensor.

and about 20 minutes of continuousdriving.Once the low pressure tire is re-in-flated to the recommended pressureand installed on the vehicle, the TPMSmalfunction indicator and the low tirepressure telltale will be extinguished.If the low pressure and TPMS mal-function indicators are not extinguishedafter about 20 minutes of continuousdriving, please visit an authorizedHyundai dealer.You may not be able to identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Always usea good quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.

A cold tire means the vehicsitting for 3 hours and drivthan 1 mile in that 3 hour

WHAT TO DO IN

!CAUTION:

o Do not use any tire sealant if your

vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage thetire pressure sensors.

o In order for the system to cor-rectly monitor tires for under-in-

flation, there should be a total ofexactly 4 sensors fitted to each of

!WARNING - TPMS

o The TPMS cannot alert you tosevere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors suchas nails or road debris.

o If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force,and slowly move to a safe posi-

This device complies wof the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to th

two conditions:1. This device may not ca

interference, and2. This device must accep

ference received, includence that may cause un

eration.

Page 190: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 190/282

!

!exactly 4 sensors fitted to each ofthe four driven wheel positions.There should be no other sen-sors in the vehicle including sparetire since this could cause the

system to monitor the wrong sen-sors.

WARNING:

Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.

and slowly move to a safe posi-tion off the road.

WARNING:Changes or modificatiopressly approved by thsponsible for compliancethe user’s authority to oequipment.

Page 191: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 191/282

WHAT TO DO IN

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow downwhile driving straight ahead. Do not

apply the brakes immediately or

attempt to pull off the road as this

may cause a loss of control. When

the car has slowed to such a speedthat it is safe to do so, brake care-

3. Have all passengers ge

car. Be sure they all ge

side of the car that is

traffic.4. When changing a flat tir

instructions provided o

description.

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Page 192: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 192/282

fully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park

on firm, level ground. If you are on

a divided highway, do not park inthe median area between the two

traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on

your emergency hazard flashers,

set the parking brake and put the

transaxle in "P" (automatic) or re-verse (manual transaxle).

Remove the installation bolt to remove

the spare tire. To replace the spare tire

in its storage compartment, tighten thebolt firmly with your fingers until thereis no more play in the spare tire.

D040B01MC

312

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

Flat tire

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the WheelD060B01MC-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

D060A01A-AAT

D060A04MC

Page 193: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 193/282

Block the wheel that is

opposite from the flat to

vehicle from rolling whenraised on the jack.

Remove the spare tire and remove the

 jack and tool bag from the trunk.

NOTE:

The spare tire and tool is located

beneath the luggage mat in the ve-

hicle trunk or luggage compartment.

D060B01MC-A

The procedure described on the fol-

lowing pages can be used to rotatetires as well as to change a flat tire.

When preparing to change a flat tire,

check to be sure the gear selector

lever is in "P" (automatic) or reverse

gear (manual transaxle) and that theparking brake is set, then:

D060A04MC

WHAT TO DO IN

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in PlaceD060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel NutsD060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

Wrench bar

Page 194: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 194/282

The base of the jack should be placed

on firm, level ground. The jack should

be positioned as shown in the drawing.

1JBA6025

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To

loosen the nuts, turn the wrenchhandle counterclockwise. When doingthis, be sure that the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut so it cannotslip off. For maximum leverage, posi-tion the wrench so the handle is to the

right. Then, while holding the wrenchnear the end of the handle, pull up onit with steady pressure. Do not re-move the nuts at this time. Just loosenthem about one-half turn.

D060D02MC

After inserting a wrench b

wheel nut wrench, install

bar into the jack as shodrawing. To raise the vehiwheel nut wrench clockw

 jack begins to raise the veh

check that it is properly pos

will not slip. If the jack ground or sand, place a bflat stone or other object

base of the jack to keep i

ing.

Wheel nut wrench

314

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

!

Raise the car high enough so that the

fully inflated spare tire can be installed.

To do this, you will need more ground

clearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it is

supported by the jack! This is very

dangerous as the vehicle could fall

Page 195: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 195/282

Loosen the wheel nuts and remove

them with your fingers. Slide the wheel

off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot

roll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel onto

them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel

slightly and get the top hole in thewheel lined up with the top stud. Then

 jiggle the wheel back and forth until the

wheel can be slid over the other studs.

dangerous as the vehicle could fall

and cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car while

the jack is being used.

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers

sharp edges. Handle the

to avoid possible severe

Before putting the wheel

be sure that there is noth

hub or wheel (such as

gravel, etc.) that interferwheel fitting solidly again

If there is, remove it.

D060G02MC

WHAT TO DO IN

!D060H02A-AAT

7. Re-install Wheel Nuts

WARNING:

If there is not good contact on themounting surface between the wheeland hub, the wheel nuts could loosen

and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss

of a wheel may result in loss of

control of the vehicle. This may

cause serious injury or death.

D060I01E-GAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tig

Page 196: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 196/282

To reinstall the wheel cover, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on the

studs and tighten them finger tight.The nuts should be installed with theirsmall diameter ends directed inward.

Jiggle the tire to be sure it is com-

pletely seated, then tighten the nuts

as much as possible with your fingersagain.

D060H03MC

Lower the car to the groun

the wheel nut wrench co

wise. Then position the shown in the drawing andwheel nuts. Be sure the

seated completely over the

stand on the wrench or us

sion pipe over the wrenchGo around the wheel tight

other nut until they are all

double-check each nut fo

316

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060J01E-AAT

After Changing Wheels

After changing wheels, have a techni-

cian tighten the wheel nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:

65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust ituntil it is correct. Always reinstall thevalve cap after checking or adjusting

tire pressure. If the cap is not re-

placed, air may leak from the tire. If

you lose a valve cap, buy another and

install it as soon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-

IF YOUR VEHICLE MTOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towbe done by your Hyundai commercial tow truck servi

help assure that your vehicleaged in towing. Also, profegenerally aware of local lawtowing. In any case, rather thage to your car, it is suggesshow this information to thoperator. Be sure that a safetem is used and that all loobserved.It i d d th t

Page 197: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 197/282

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

D060J02MC

ways secure the flat tire in its place in

the trunk and return the jack and tools

to their proper storage locations.

It is recommended that youtowed with a wheel lift anflatbed equipment with all ththe ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be dama

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is

o When the engine will nsure the steering is unlocing the key in the "ACC

WHAT TO DO IN

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care

not to cause damage to the bumperor underbody of the vehicle.

NOTE:Before towing, check the automatic transaxle fluid. Ithe "HOT" range on the d

fluid. If you cannot add fludolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheesion components are damvehicle is being towed wwheels on the ground, u

dolly under the front wheo Manual Transaxle:

If you do not use a towing

!D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

1)

2)

Page 198: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 198/282

!

If you do not use a towingthe ignition key in the "Aand put the transaxle in "

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key remthe "LOCK" position when the rear without a towing d

D080B02MC

o Do not tow with sling type truck asthis may cause damage to thebumper or underbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with therear wheels on the ground, be sure theparking brake is released.

D080B01MC

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment

(3).

3) dolly

318

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D080D01MC-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWINGFor emergency towing whencial tow vehicle is available, cable, chain or strap to one ohooks under the front/rear of

not attempt to tow your vemanner on any unpaved smay result in serious damageNor should it be attempted ifdrive train, axles, steering odamaged. Before towing, transaxle is in neutral and

"ACC" (with the engine off) oposition (with the engine rdriver must be in the towed c

! CAUTION:

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under thefront wheels. Front

Page 199: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 199/282

driver must be in the towed cand operate the brakes.

NOTE:

Before towing, check the automatic transaxle fluid. Ithe "HOT" range on the dfluid. If you cannot add fludolly must be used.

OMC045015

OMC045016

D080B03MC

A vehicle with an automatic transaxleshould never be towed from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground.This can cause serious damage to the

transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

Rear

WHAT TO DO IN

CAUTION:If the car is being towed wwheels on the ground, it caonly from the front Be su

!OMC045014

(2)T k t th t i h k f th j k

How to Use Front Towing Hook  (3)Attach a tow cable, chain otowing hook on the front

NOTE:

Place the towing hook & cover in its original positionuse.

Page 200: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 200/282

only from the front. Be sutransaxle is in neutral. Dospeeds greater than 30 mpand for more than 15 miles

sure the steering is unlocking the key in the "ACC" driver must be in the toweoperate the steering and b

OMC045013

(1)Open the towing hole cover by push-ing it with your finger.

(2)Take out the towing hook from the jackcase. To mount the towing hook, ro-tate it clockwise.

NOTE:The jack case is located on the sparetire in the trunk or luggage compart-ment.

! CAUTIONIt should be tightened firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play in thetowing hole. Towing hook is located inthe jack case on the spare tire.

320

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundaidealers can make you a new key if youhave your key number.

If you lock the keys inside your car andyou cannot obtain a new key, manyHyundai dealers can use special tools toopen the door for you.

Page 201: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 201/282

CORROSION PREVENTION &APPEARANCE CARE

4

Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion .......................................... 4-3

Washing and Waxing.................................................... 4-4

Cleaning the Interior...................................................... 4-6

Page 202: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 202/282

4

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosionon your car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

o Removal of paint or protective coat-ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or

minor scrapes and dents which leaveunprotected metal exposed to corro-sion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-

rosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the high-est quality. However, this is only part ofthe job. To achieve the long term corro-sion resistance your Hyundai can deliver,the owner's cooperation and assistance

is also required.

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosi

Moisture creates the conditicorrosion is most likely to oc

ample, corrosion is accelerahumidity, particularly when tare just above freezing. In tions, the corrosive materiacontact with the car surfacesthat is slow to evaporate.Mud is a particular enemy protection because it is slowholds moisture in contact whicle Even though the mud

Page 203: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 203/282

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and indus-

trial pollution.

hicle. Even though the mudbe dry, it can still retain mpromote corrosion.High temperatures can also

corrosion of parts that are ventilated so the moisture persed. For all these reasoticularly important to keep yoand free of mud or accumulamaterials. This applies not visible surfaces but particu

underside of the car.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

TO HELP PREVENT COR-ROSIONE020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion fromgetting started by observing the follow-ing:

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside ofthe car is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in G

tion

Scratches or chips in the finicovered with "touch-up" painpossible to reduce the possrosion. If bare metal is showthe attention of a qualified boshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppincorrosive and may damage faces in just a few hours. Alwbird droppings as soon as p

Do a thorough job; just dampening theaccumulated mud rather than washingit away will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to ac-celerate corro-sion.

Page 204: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 204/282

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.— you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car atleast once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

o When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car inthe garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

bird droppings as soon as p

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under thand carpeting to cause corrounder the mats periodically tocarpeting is dry. Use particulcarry fertilizers, cleaning

chemicals in the car.These should be carried oncontainers and any spills or be cleaned up, flushed withand thoroughly dried.

Page 205: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 205/282

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents orcorrosive cleaning agents. These can

damage the finish of the car. To removeroad tar, use turpentine on a clean, softcloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, usewarm water and mild soap or car-wash-ing solution. Soak the spot and rub gen-tly. If the paint has lost its luster, use acommercial car-cleaning polish.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax twhen water no longer beads

surface but spreads out ovarea.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must bepreserve the appearance of on your Hyundai. They are:

! CAUTION:

Page 206: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 206/282

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before pol-ishing or waxing or using a combinationcleaner and wax. Use a good qualitycommercial product and follow themanufacturer's directions on the con-tainer. Polish and wax the bright trimpieces as well as the paint.

o Be careful not to spill balyte or hydraulic brake bumpers. If you do, washdiately with clean water.

o Be gentle when cleaningsurfaces. They are made oand the surface can be mistreated. Do not use abers. Use warm water and

carwashing solution.o Do not expose the bumtemperatures. For exampleyour car repainted, do nbumpers on the car if theto be placed in a high-paint booth.

OJB037800

o Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressurewater washing may cause the failureof electrical circuits located in theengine compartment.

o Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/elec-tronic components inside the vehicle

as this may damage them.

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, ussponge with mild soap or de

warm water. Do not use sgents, dye, bleach or abrason the seat belts as this mayfabric.While cleaning the belts, inspexcessive wear, cuts, fraysigns of damage and replnecessary.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.

Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on thesurface to loosen the dirt, then wipe witha clean damp sponge or cloth. If all thedirt stains are not removed, repeat thisprocedure until the upholstery is clean.Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thin-ner or other strong cleaners.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-ers of this type are available in aerosol

cans in liquid form or powder. Read theinstructions and follow them exactly. Us-ing a vacuum cleaner with the appropri-ate attachment, remove as much dirt fromthe carpets as possible. Apply the foamfollowing the manufacturer's directions,then rub in overlapping circles. Do notadd water. These cleaners work bestwhen the carpet is kept as dry as pos-sible.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Page 207: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 207/282

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any househcleaner on the windows. Hocleaning the inside of the reacareful not to damage the defroster wiring.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APP

ANY QUESTIONS?

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the careof your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Page 208: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 208/282

Maintenance Intervals................................................... 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-6

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items ............. 5-7

California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

Page 209: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 209/282

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatestnumber of miles of satisfying operation

from your Hyundai, certain maintenanceprocedures must be performed. Althoughcareful design and engineering have re-duced these to a minimum, those that arerequired are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have thesemaintenance procedures performed tocomply with the terms of the warrantiescovering your new Hyundai. The Owner'sHandbook supplied with your new ve-hi l id f th i f ti b t

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checkperform when you drive you

you fill the fuel tank. A list ofwill be found on page 6-3.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as in-spections, adjustments and replacements

that are listed in the maintenance chartsstarting on page 5-4. These proceduresmust be performed at the intervals shownin the maintenance schedule to assurethat your warranty remains in effect. Al-though it is strongly recommended thatthey be performed by the factory-trainedor distributor-trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures maybe performed at any qualified servicef ilit

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenan

If you are mechanically incfew tools that are required take the time to do so, youand service a number of item

Page 210: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 210/282

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

hicle provides further information aboutthese warranties.

facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundaiservice parts be used for any required

repairs or replacements. Other parts ofequivalent quality such as engine oil,engine coolant, manual or auto transaxleoil, brake fluid and so on which are notsupplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affect-ing your warranty coverage but you should

always be sure these are equivalent tothe quality of the original Hyundai parts.Your Owner's Handbook provides furtherinformation about your warranty cover-age.

and service a number of iteminformation about doing it ySection 6.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTSF020A02A-AAT

o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.

o Receipts for all emission control sys-tem services should be retained todemonstrate compliance with condi-tions of the emissions system war-ranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow the

prescribed maintenance intervals.o For severe usage maintenance re-

quirements, see page 5-6 of this sec-tion

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundaiserviced, keep copies of the service

records in your glove box. This willhelp ensure that you can documentthat the required procedures have beenperformed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially importantwhen service is not performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own mainte-nance and repairs, you may find ithelpful to have an official HyundaiShop Manual A copy of this publica

Page 211: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 211/282

tion.Shop Manual. A copy of this publica-tion may be purchased at your Hyundaidealer's parts department.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

No. DESCRIPTION

1

2

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

37.5

60

30

R

45

72

36

R

52.5

84

42

R

R

60

96

48

R

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

97.5

156

78

R

105

168

84

R

R

112.5

180

90

R

120

192

96

R

127.5

204

102

R

F030B02MC-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts fservices to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whicfirst.

Page 212: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 212/282

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

I

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, ALTERNATOR AND A/CON)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS CALIPERS AND ROTORS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

15

24

12

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

45

72

36

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

60

96

48

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

75

120

60

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

105

168

84

R

I

I

112.5

180

90

120

192

96

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

F030C2MC-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

See Note *1

Page 213: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 213/282

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARMBALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note *2

Note :*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.

AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.*2. FOR EVERY 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM) OR 12 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6

DRCON

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORSREAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS,

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX LINKAGE

R

R

R

I

I

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

MAINTENANCE ITEM

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, C, D,

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A02MC-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to thefor the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

Page 214: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 214/282

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE

& BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

I

I

R

R

R

R

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 37,500 MILES (60,000 KM) OR 48 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in normal

temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial u

towing

J - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

C, D, E, F,

C, E, F

B, C, D, E,

A, C, D, E,

A, C, E, F,

C, E

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMSF060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and

Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. Havea trained techincian, replace any dam-aged or leaking parts immediately.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause hard start-ing If an excessive amount of foreign

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is beingdriven in severe conditions, more fre-quent oil and filter changes are required.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air clerecommended when the filte

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel F

The vapor hose and fuel fillebe inspected at those interv

in the maintenance schedulethat a new vapor hose or fuecorrectly replaced.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

Page 215: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 215/282

ing. If an excessive amount of foreignmatter accumulates in the fuel tank, thefilter may require replacement more fre-

quently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by trainedtechnicians.

gand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact with anyheat source, sharp edges or moving com-

ponent which might cause heat damageor mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidcracks, excessive wear or oand replace if necessary. should be checked periodicatension and adjusted as ne

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spthe correct heat range.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums/Lin

Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drumsfor scoring, burning, leaking

t d i

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper chafing, cracks, deterioratio

leakage. Replace any detdamaged parts immediately

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engine andtransaxle are at normal operating tem-perature. Check the automatic transaxlefluid level with the engine running andthe transaxle in neutral, with the parkingbrake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP

III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meetingthe SP III specification approved byHyundai Motor Co. when adding or chang-ing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may resultin damage to the ATM

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt

for damage and deformation. Replaceany damaged parts immediately.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

Page 216: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 216/282

parts, and excessive wear.parking brake system including brake lever and cables.

service procedures, refer tManual.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

in damage to the ATM.F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possibleleaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &

Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and ball

 joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts as

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrig

Check the air conditioning linnections for leakage and damair conditioning performancto the relevant shop manual

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, bootsfor cracks, deterioration, or d

place any damaged parts asary, repack the grease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and

Hoses

Page 217: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 217/282

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary.

p

Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately. Inspect the power steering belt forevidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,oiliness and proper tension. Replace oradjust it if necessary.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATENOTICEF080A01NF-AAT

Perchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, suchas airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensionersand keyless remote entry batteries, mustbe disposed of according to Title 22 Cali-fornia Code of Regulations Section

67384.10 (a).

Page 218: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 218/282

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2

General Checks ............................................................ 6-3Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-7Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-8

Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-11Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-13Air Conditioning Care 6 14

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

Page 219: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 219/282

Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-14Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-15

Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-16Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-19Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-21Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-22Bulb Wattages............................................................. 6-28

Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-29

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01MC-AAT

CAUTION:When inspecting orthe engine, you shotools and other heacarefully so that t

!

Page 220: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 220/282

1. Engine coolant reservoir .......... 6-72. Engine oil filler cap .................. 6-63. Brake fluid reservoir ............... 6-144. Air cleaner filter ........................ 6-8

5. Windshield washer fluidreservoir cap ........................... 6-10

6. Power steering fluid reservoir(If Installed) ............................. 6-21

7. Engine oil level dipstick ........... 6-5

8. Radiator cap .................9. Automatic transaxle fluid

dipstick (If Installed) ......10. Battery ...........................11. Fuse/Relay box .............

ycover of the engine iaged.

Page 221: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 221/282

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4 CHECKING THE ENG

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the and service of the engine. It that you check the oil level a

a week in normal use and myou are on a trip or drivinconditions.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS

!G020D01TG-GAT

Improper or incomplete service may re-sult in problems. This section gives in-structions only for the maintenance items

that are easy to perform.Several procedures should be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:Improper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warranty

coverage.

WARNING:o Performing maintenance work on a

vehicle can be dangerous. You canbe seriously injured while perform-ing some maintenance procedures.If you lack sufficient knowledge andexperience or the proper tools andequipment to do the work, have itdone by an authorized Hyundai

dealer.o Working under the hood with the en-

gine running is dangerous. It be-comes even more dangerous whenyou wear jewelry or loose clothing.

Page 222: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 222/282

The engine oil quality shoufollowing classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

you wear jewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangled inmoving parts and result in injury.

Therefore, if you must run the enginewhile working under the hood, makecertain that you remove all jewelry(especially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose clothing

before getting near the engine orcooling fans.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the

G030C01MC

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20

(5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil ispreferred regardless of regional op-tion and engine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oilis not available, secondary recom-mended engine oil for correspondingtemperature range can be used.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touctor hose when checking thas it may be hot enough to

Page 223: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 223/282

e o e c ec g e o , a up eengine to the normal operating tempera-ture and be sure it is parked on level

ground. Turn the engine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dip-stick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstickand withdraw it again. Then note thehighest level the oil has reached on the

dipstick. It should be between the upper("F") and lower ("L") range.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil byusing a funnel. Do not overfill so as notto damage engine.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radia-tor hose when adding the engine oil asit may be hot enough to burn you.

G030D02MC-AAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the "L"

G030D02MC

! PROPOSITION 65 This product contains a cheto the State of California tocer. Used engine oil may tion or cancer of the skin itact with the skin for prolonof time. Used engine oil concals that have caused canctory animals. Always prote

by washing your hands thosoap and warm water as ssible after handling used o

Page 224: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 224/282

mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Donot overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clock-wise.

The distance between the "F" and "L"marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil.

NOTE:o It is recommended that the engine oil

and filter should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o Always dispose of used engine oil inan environmentally acceptable man-ner. It is suggested that it be placed

in a sealed container and taken to aservice station for reclaimation. Donot pour the oil on the ground or putit into the household trash.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. When the engine ishot, the engine coolant is under pres-sure and may erupt through the open-ing if the cap is removed. You could beseriously burned if you do not observethis precaution. Do not remove the ra-

diator cap until the radiator is cool tothe touch.

NOTE:It is recommended that the engine cool

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol cool-ant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine

coolant should be compatible with alumi-num engine parts. Additional corrosioninhibitors or additives should not be used.The cooling system must be maintainedwith the correct concentration and type ofengine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion.

Never allow the concentration of anti-freeze to exceed the 60% level or gobelow the 35% level or damage to thecoolant system may result. For properconcentration when adding or replacing

G050C01TG-AAT

To Check the Coolant Le

The coolant level can be see

Page 225: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 225/282

It is recommended that the engine cool-ant should be changed by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.

concentration when adding or replacingthe coolant, refer to the following table.

Water

65%

60%

50%

40%

Antifreeze

solution

35%

40%

50%

60%

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

Engine coolant

concentration

of the plastic coolant reservoof the coolant should be betw

and "F" lines on the reservoengine is cool. If the level is bmark, add engine coolant tbetween "L" and "F". If the inspect for coolant leaks andfluid level frequently. If theagain, visit your Hyundai dinspection and diagnosis of

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

OMC055010

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the fin-

ish of your car. If you spill enginecoolant on the car, wash it off thor-oughly with clean water.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion and

freezing.Do not use hard water. Hard watercan cause engine damage from cor-rosion, overheating or freezing.

!CAUTION:

o Operating your vehicleproper air filter in place excessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cbe careful that dust or denter the air intake. Thsult in damage to the filter.

!

Page 226: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 226/282

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.

2. When this is done, the cover can belifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the cooling

fan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine cool-ant temperature decreases, the fan willautomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefullyinspected from time to time and cleanedto remove accumulations of road film or

other debris. To clean the wiper bladesand arms, use a clean sponge or clothwith a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smearthe glass, replace them with genuineHyundai replacement parts or theirequivalent.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry

l Thi lt i id

! 2. Raise the wiper blade ligup it.

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

Page 227: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 227/282

glass. This can result in more rapidwear of the wiper blades and may

scratch the glass.o Keep the blade rubber out of contact

with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.

1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach itfrom the wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

Page 228: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 228/282

DO-IT-YOURSEL

!

G100A01MC-GAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manualtransaxle should be checked at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEOIL (MANUAL)

!CAUTION:

o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)should not be used in the washersystem because it will damage thecar's finish.

o The washer should not be operatedif the washer reservoir is empty.This can damage the washer fluidpump.

WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxleoil level when the engine is cool or cold.

If the engine is hot, you should exercisegreat caution to avoid burning yourselfon hot engine or exhaust parts.

WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents con-

G110A01MC-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automashould be checked at thospecified in the vehicle mschedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid isred color. As driving distancthe fluid color turns darkishally. It is a normal conditi

should not judge the needbased upon the changing cYou must replace the transaxle fluid in accordancvals specified in the vehinance schedule in section

CHECKING THE TRANFLUID (AUTOMATIC

Page 229: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 229/282

o Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and

can be flammable under certain cir-cumstances. Do not allow sparks orflame to contact the washer fluid orthe washer fluid reservoir. Damageto the vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poison-

ous to humans and animals. Do notdrink windshield washer fluid. Seri-ous injury or death could occur.

NOTE:It is recommended that the manualtransaxle fluid should be checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

nance schedule in section

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

12

G110D02MC

! CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives maycause damage to the automatictransaxle.Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SPIII, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III orother brands meeting the SP III specifi-cation approved by Hyundai Motor Co..If you are having your vehicle serviced

at a facility other than a Hyundai dealer,verify that the correct ATF is used foryour vehicle.

G110D03A-AAT

Checking the automatic transaxle

fluid level

1. Place the shift lever in position and confirm the ening at idle speed.

2. After the transaxle is warmciently [(fluid temperature(70~80°C)], for example utes usual driving, move tthrough all positions theshift lever in N (Neutral)position.

The automatic transaxle fluid level should

Page 230: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 230/282

! WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at normaloperating temperature. This means thatthe engine, radiator, exhaust systemetc., are very hot. Exercise great carenot to burn yourself during this proce-

dure.

The automatic transaxle fluid level shouldbe checked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on level ground with theparking brake applied and check the fluidlevel according to the following proce-dure.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

CHECKING THE BR

G120A01A-AAT

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid

CAUTION:Because brakes are esse

safe operation of the cargested that they be checspected by your Hyundai brakes should be checkspected for wear at thosspecified in the vehicle mschedule in Section 5.

!!

3. Confirm if the fluid level is in the "HOT"range on the level gauge. If the fluidlevel is lower, add the specified fluidfrom the fill hole If the fluid level is

G110D03MC

Fluid level should be within"HOT" range WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by theengine coolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when the en-gine is not running. Use extreme cau-tion when working near the blades ofthe cooling fan, so that you are notinjured by a rotating fan blade. As theengine coolant temperature decreases,

the fan will automatically shut off. Thisis a normal condition.

Page 231: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 231/282

!

g

WARNING:Use caution when handlingIt can damage your vision iyour eyes. It will also davehicle's paint if spilled o

removed immediately.

from the fill hole. If the fluid level ishigher, drain the fluid from the drain

hole.4. If the fluid level is checked in cold

condition [(fluid temperature 68~86°F(20~30°C)], add the fluid to the "COLD"line and then recheck the fluid levelaccording to the above step 2.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

14

!

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid LevelG120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoirshould be checked periodically The level

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to re-main open any longer than required.

This will avoid entry of dirt and moisturewhich can damage the brake systemand cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid first wipe away any

OMC055015

AIR CONDITIONER

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser C

The air conditioner condensgine radiator) should be chec

cally for accumulation of dsects, leaves, etc. These cwith maximum cooling efficremoving such accumulatiohose them away carefully toing the cooling fans.

Page 232: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 232/282

should be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"marks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, care-fully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Donot overfill.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away anydirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.

Slowly pour the recommended fluid intothe reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefullyreplace the cap on the reservoir andtighten.

Page 233: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 233/282

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16

3. Take out the climate control air filterand replace it with a new one.

4. Installation is the reverse order of dis-assembly

OMC055013

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link 

A fusible link will melt if the electricalcircuits from the battery are ever over-

OMC045003

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible use anything but a new fusithe same or lower ampeNever use a piece of wire rated fusible link. This couserious damage and creatard.

!

CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES

Page 234: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 234/282

assembly. yloaded, thus preventing damage to the

entire wiring harness. (This could becaused by a short in the system drawingtoo much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine thecause, repair the system and replace thefusible link. The fusible links are locatedin a relay box for easy inspection.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

G200B02HP-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuses

The fuse box for the lights and otherelectrical accessories will be found low

1. Turn off the ignition and all otherswitches.

2. Open the fuse box and examine eachfuse. Remove each fuse by pulling ittoward you (a small "fuse puller" tool iscontained in the relay and fuse box ofthe engine room to simplify this opera-tion).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses, evenif you find one that appears to haveopened.

4. Replace the blown fuse bnew fuse of the same ratinThe fuse should be a snughave the fuse clip repairedby a Hyundai dealer. If

have a spare fuse, you maborrow a fuse of the sarating from an accessory yporarily get along without cigarette lighter, for examremember to replace th

fuse.

OMC045001

Page 235: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 235/282

Good Open-

on the dashboard on the driver's side.

Inside the box you will find a list showingthe circuits protected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown (open)fuse could be the reason. If the fuse hasopened, you will see that the metal stripinside the fuse has melted through. If you

suspect a blown fuse, follow this proce-dure:

G200B02MC

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

18

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon asthe accessory is turned on, the prob-lem is serious and should be referred toa Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and re-pair. Never replace a fuse with anythingexcept a fuse with the same or a lower

amperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.

!

NOTE:

G200C01CM-GAT

Power ConnectorNOTE:o If the power connector

from the fuse panel, tchime, audio, clock alamps, etc., will not oper

lowing items must be replacement.- Digital Clock - Trip computer- Automatic heating and c

trol system

- Audioo Even though the power cpulled up, the battery discharged by operationlights or other electrica

Your vehicle is equipped with a powert t t b tt di h if

G200F01MC

Page 236: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 236/282

See page 6-29 for the fuse panel de-

scriptions.

connector to prevent battery discharge if

your vehicle is parked without being op-erated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover andpull up the power connector.

4. Insert the power connector in the op-posite direction.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assis-tance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out

your eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth saturat-ed with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink alarge quantity of water or milk followedby milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg ordrink vegetable oil. Get medical assis-tance as soon as possible.

Whil b i b i h d ( i h

OMC055018

G210B04A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Anycorrosion around the battery

minals should be removed ution of household baking sodwater. After the battery termcover them with a light coatin

! PROPOSITION 65 Battery posts, terminals, accessories contain lead anpounds, chemicals knownof California to cause canproductive harm.

Page 237: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 237/282

Batteries can be dangerous! When

working with batteries, carefully ob-serve the following precautions to avoidserious injuries.

While batteries are being charged (either

by a battery charger or by the vehicle'salternator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to pre-vent injuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well venti-lated area.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smok-ing in the area.

o Keep children away from the area.

The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poison-ous and highly corrosive. Be careful notto spill it on yourself or the car. If you dospill battery fluid on yourself, immediatelydo the following:

Batteries also contain othe

known to the state of Califorcancer. Wash hands after

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

20

!

G220A01A-AAT

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Coolin

WARNING:The radiator fan is controlle

coolant temperature and times operate even when thnot running. Use extreme caworking near the blades offan, so that you are not inrotating fan blade. As the cperature decreases the famatically shut off. This is a dition.

CHECKING ELECOOLING FANS

!If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the con-

tacted area.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical atten-tion immediately.Wear eye protection whencharging or working near a

battery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case may

b tt id t l k lti

WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-

dling a battery.Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is always

present in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-t id t t t ki

! WARNING:

Page 238: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 238/282

Checking Engine Coolin

The engine cooling fan shouautomatically if the engine cperature is high.

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser CoThe condenser cooling fan son automatically whenever ttioner is in operation.

cause battery acid to leak, resulting

in personal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppo-site corners.

o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.

o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignitionswitched on.

tery acid to contact your skin,

eyes, clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. If pos-sible, continue to apply waterwith a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.

Page 239: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 239/282

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

22

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS

!

G260A01MC-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb,be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"position.The next paragraph shows how to reachthe light bulbs so they may be changed.Be sure to replace the burned-out bulbwith one of the same number and watt-age rating.See page 6-28 for the wattage descrip-tions.

CAUTION:o Keep the lamps out of contact with

petroleum products, such as oil,gasoline etc

G270A02MC-GAT

Headlight, Front Turn Signal Light

and Front Fog Light

OMC055021

Turn signal

light

Headlight

Fog light

o After heavy, driving rainheadlight and taillight leappear frosty. This ccaused by the tempera

ence between the lampoutside. This is similardensation on your windyour vehicle during thdoesn’t indicate a problevehicle. If the water lea

lamp bulb circuitry, havechecked by an authorizdealer.

Page 240: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 240/282

Headlight

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wtection.

2. Open the engine hood anthe negative (-) post of th

3. Always grasp the bulb bbase, avoid touching the

4. Disconnect the power coback of the headlight.

gasoline, etc.

o If you don't have necessary tools,the correct bulbs and the expertise,consult your authorized Hyundaidealer.

CAUTION:o The headlight aiming should be

checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer after replacing the headlightbulbs.

!

DO-IT-YOURSEL

G270A03O

! WARNING:o When removing/replacing halogen

bulbs, always handle the metal body

5. Remove the socket cover.6. Push the bulb spring to remove the

headlight bulb.7. Remove the protective cap from the

replacement bulb and install the new

OMC055022

Front Turn Signal ligh

1. Open the engine hood anthe negative (-) post of th

2 Di t th

Page 241: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 241/282

bulbs, always handle the metal body

of the bulb, not the glass.o The halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shat-ter, resulting in flying fragments. Al-ways wear eye protection when ser-vicing the bulb. Protect the bulbagainst abrasions or scratches and

against liquids when lighted. Turnthe bulb on only when installed in aheadlight. Replace the headlight ifdamaged or cracked. Keep the bulbout of the reach of children and dis-pose of the used bulb with care.

replacement bulb and install the new

bulb by matching the plastic base withthe headlight hole. Reattach the bulbspring and install the socket cover.Reconnect the power cord.

8. Use the protective cap and carton todispose of the old bulb.

9.Check for proper headlight aim.

2. Disconnect the power co

bulb.3. Take out the bulb from the

by turning it counterclock4. Install the new bulb.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

24

Front Fog Light (If Installed)

NOTE:It is recommended that the front foglight bulb be replaced by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.

3. Remove the nuts of the rear combina-tion light with a spanner.

G270D01MC-AAT

Rear Combination Light

1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate(3 Door).

OMC055025

4 Door

4 Door 4 Door

3 Door

Page 242: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 242/282

4. Detach the rear combinationing it out (4 Door) or removescrews of the rear combinatiophillips screwdriver (3 Door

OMC055024

2. Remove the cover on the inside ofluggage trim.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

5. To replace the rear combination light,take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Tail Light

OMC055027

G270C01MC-GAT

Luggage Compartment Light

OMC055028

3. Replace with a new bulb

2. Carefully remove the covehead screwdriver.

4 Door

3 Door

Page 243: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 243/282

OMC055028-1

(1) Tail Light

(2) Turn Signal Light(3) Back-up Light(4) Stop/Tail Light

6. Install the new bulb.

1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate(3 Door).

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26

G270G01MC-GAT

Map Light (If Installed)

1. Remove the cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.

2 Replace with a new bulb

OMC055029

G275H01MC-GAT

Interior Light

1. Remove the cover withscrewdriver.

2 Replace with a new bulb

G270E01A-GAT

Side Repeater Light

G270E01MC

1. Push the cover toward the front ofvehicle and remove it.

2 Di t th d

Page 244: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 244/282

2. Replace with a new bulb. 2. Replace with a new bulb2. Disconnect the power code.3. Replace with a new bulb.

DO-IT-YOURSEL

G270K01TG-AAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

(If Installed)

1. Open the glove box.

OMC055031

Page 245: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 245/282

2. Remove the glove box illuminated lightcover with a flat-head screwdriver.3. Replace with a new bulb.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

28 BULB WATTAGE

G280A02MC-AAT

4 Door 3 Door

Page 246: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 246/282

Socket Type

P43t-38

BAY15d

W2.1X9.5d

S8.5/8.5

PG13

W2.1X9.5d

Part Name

Stop/Tail Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

Part Name

Headlight (High/Low)

Front Turn Signal Light/ 

Side Marker Light

Map Light (If Installed)

Interior Light

Front Fog Light (If Installed)

Side Repeater Light (If Installed)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

No.

7

8

9

10

11

12

Wattage

55/60

28/8

10

10

27

5

Wattage

27/8

16

5

27

16

5

So

W

W

DO-IT-YOURSEL

FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

FUSE RATING

125A

50A

40A

40A

40A

40A

30A

30A

30A

30A

30A

20A

15A

10A

10A

10A

G200C01MC-AAT

Engine CompartmentCIRCUIT PROTECTED

Generator

I/P Junction Box

Blower Relay, Blower Motor

ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

Start Relay, Ignition Switch

Ignition Switch

I/P Junction Box, Tail Lamp Relay

I/P Junction Box, Power Window Relay

Radiator Fan Relay

Main Relay, Fuel Pump RelayECM, PCM

Injector #1, #2, #3, #4, CVVT Oil Control Valve, Immobilizer Contro

Control Solenoid Valve, Idle Speed Control Actuator, Fuel Pump R

A/Con Relay

A/C Control Module

ECM, PCM

MAIN

BATT #1

BLOWER

ABS #1

ABS #2

IGN #2

IGN #1

BATT #2

P/WDW

RAD

ECU AECU C

INJ

A/CON #1

A/CON #2

ECU B

FUSE

Page 247: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 247/282

10A

10A

30A

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printinginspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn RelayA/Con Relay, Rad Fan Relay, Cond Fan Relay #1, #2, Cam

Sensor,Oxygen Sensor(UP, DOWN), Mass Air Flow Sensor

Condenser Fan Relay #1

HORN

SNSR

COND

G200C01MC

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

30

G200E01MC-AAT

Inner PanelFUSE RATING

25A

25A

10A

25A

10A

10A

15A

25A

10A

10A

20A

10A

10A

CIRCUIT PROTECTED

Driver Power Window Switch, Assist Power Window Switch,Rear

Switch RH

Driver Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

Power Outside Mirror Switch, Digital Clock, Audio

Cigarette Lighter, Power Outlet

Head Lamp LH, DRL Control Module

ECM, Driver Power Outside Mirror Motor,Assist Power Outside Mirr

Rear Defogger Switch

Multi-function Swicth, Rear Wiper Motor

Multi-function Switch, Front Wiper Motor

Rear Combination Lamp LH, License Lamp LH(3DOOR),Turn Sign

Front Fog Relay

Driver Seat Warmer Switch, Assist Seat Warmer Switch

Active Interior & Humidity Sensor, A/C Control Module, BCM, Blowe

Motor

Rear Combination Lamp RH, License Lamp RH(3DOOR), License L

Shunt Connector, Turn Signal Lamp RH

P/WDW RH

P/WDW LH

AUDIO

C/LIGHTER

H/LP (LH)

HTD MIRR

RR WIPER

FR WIPER

TAIL LP (LH)

IGN

HTD SEAT

BLOWER

TAIL LP (RH)

FUSE

Page 248: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 248/282

G200E01MC

30A25A

10A

10A

15A

10A

BCM, Rear Defogger, Rear Defogger RelayAMP

Head Lamp RH, Instrument Cluster, DRL Control Module

Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch

SRS Control Module

Telltale Lamp, Passenger Seat Track Position Sensor

HTD GLASSAMP

H/LP (RH)

HAZARD

A/BAG

SNSR

DO-IT-YOURSEL

FUSE RATING

10A

20A

10A

10A

15A

10A

10A

20A

10A

10A

15A

15A

CIRCUIT PROTECTED

Front Fog Lamp Switch, Front Fog Lamp LH, Front Fog Lamp RH, Front Fog

Lamp Relay

Sunroof Motor

Hazard Switch

Overdrive Switch, Vehicle Speed Sensor

Data Link Connector, Stop Lamp Switch, P/WDW Relay,Multipurpose Check

Connector

Instrument Cluster

ECM, PCM

Driver Door Lock Actuator, Assist Door Lock Actuator, BCM,Rear Door Lock

Actuator LH, Rear Door Lock Actuator RH,Driver Power Window Switch, Tail

Gate Lock Actuator

Start Relay, Burglar Alarm Relay

BCM, Instrument Cluster, Generator, DRL Control Module, Tire Pressure

Monitoring Module, Pre-excitation Resistor

Ignition Coil #1, #2, #3, #4, Condenser

Audio

FR FOG LP

S/ROOF

T/SIG LP

TCU

STOP LP

A/BAG IND

ECU

C/DR LOCK

START

CLUSTER

IGN COIL

AUDIO

FUSE

Page 249: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 249/282

15A

10A

10A

10A

10A

Audio

Luggage Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch, Digital Clock,Overhead

Console Lamp, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Door Warning Switch,

BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module

ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

Back-up Lamp Switch, Transaxle Range Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector

DRL Control Module

(Power Connector)

MULT B/UP

(Power Connector)

ABS

B/UP LP

DRL

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2

Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

Page 250: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 250/282

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Canister

Fuel vapors generated instank are absorbed and stonboard canister. When th

running, the fuel vapors abscanister are drawn into the intem through the purge convalve.

Purge Control Solenoid Va

The purge control solenoid vtrolled by the Engine Con(ECM); when the engine cperature is low during idlingcloses so that evaporated fueinto the engine. After the enup during ordinary driving

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control

System

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase. This system suppliesfiltered fresh air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,then passes through the PCV valve into

the induction system.

H010A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all require-ments of the U.S. Environmental Protec-tion Agency or California Air Resources

Board.There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System

3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is recom-mended that you have your car inspectedand maintained by an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance with the mainte-

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-

cluding ORVR: Onboard Refuel-

Page 251: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 251/282

opens to introduce evaporateengine.

nance schedule in this manual.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission

Control System

The Exhaust Emission Conta highly effective system whexhaust emissions while good vehicle performace.

ing Vapor Recovery) SystemThe Evaporative Emission Control Sys-tem is designed to prevent fuel vaporsfrom escaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded

into a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuelvapors into the atmosphere.)

EMISSION CO

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

!!H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with amonolith type three-way catalytic con-verter to reduce the carbon monoxide,hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides con-

WARNING:o Do not touch the catalyt

or any other part of the e

tem while the catalytic chot. Shut off the engineleast one hour before tocatalytic converter or anof the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyuis your best source of a

o Do not stop your Hyundcombustible material supaper, leaves or rags. Thals might contact the hconverter and a fire mig

H020A01MCCatalytic Converter

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operat-

ing condition. Extremely high cata-lytic converter temperatures can re-sult from improper operation of theelectrical, ignition or multiport elec-tronic fuel injection.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks,or is hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the prob-lem as soon as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuellevel. Running out of gasoline maycause the engine to misfire and re-sult in damage to the catalytic con-

Page 252: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 252/282

tained in the exhaust gas. Exhaust gasespassing through the catalytic convertercause it to operate at a very high tem-perature. The introduction of largeamounts of unburned gasoline into theexhaust may cause the catalytic converterto overheat and create a fire hazard. This

risk may be reduced by observing thefollowing:

verter.o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING

SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDINGARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................. 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................. 8-3Tire Information ............................................................. 8-3Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures .............. 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure .................................. 8-5Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-6Tire Terminology and Definitions .................................. 8-8All Season Tires ......................................................... 8-10Snow Tires .................................................................. 8-10Tire Chains ................................................................. 8-10Tire Rotation ............................................................... 8-11Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-12

8

Page 253: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 253/282

Tire Traction................................................................ 8-12When to Replace Tires............................................... 8-12Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-13Spare Tire and Tools .................................................. 8-14Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ......................... 8-15

Consumer Information ................................................ 8-15Reporting Safety Defects ........................................... 8-18Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ...................... 8-18

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)I010A01MC-AAT The vehicle identification num

the number used in registerand in all legal matters perownership, etc. It can be fodifferent places on your car

1. Lower side of the front paunder the carpet.

2. On the left top side of thpanel where it can be seedown through the windsh

3. Door edge post4. On the lower side of the

outer panel.1JBA5003

1JBN5007A

1

2

3

4

Page 254: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 254/282

1JBA5004

1JBA5005

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

ENGINE NUMBER

I010B01A-AAT

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyndaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-

mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I030A02MC-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD T

TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the dof the center pillar outer

OMC065001

Page 255: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 255/282

the cold tire pressures recfor your vehicle with the size, the number of peoplein your vehicle and vehicweight.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

4

!

These pressures were chovide the most satisfactortion of ride comfort, tirestability under normal con

pressures should be checmonthly. Proper tire inflatioshould be maintained forsons:

WARNING:o Inspect your tires freq

proper inflation as weand damage. Alwayspressure gauge.

o Tires with too much o

C190F01MC-1 C190F01MC-3

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

Page 256: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 256/282

pressure wear unevenpoor handling, loss control, and sudden leading to accidents, ineven death. The recocold tire pressure fohicle can be found in tand on the tire label the driver's side of pillar.C190F01MC-2 C190F01MC-4

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

!

!

o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.See page 8-12.

o Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Hyundai rec-ommends that you check thespare every time you check the

pressure of the other tires onyour vehicle.

CAUTION:

Always observe the follo

o Check pressures whe

are cold. (After the vbeen parked for at l

hours or hasn't been d

than one mile (1.6 km)

ing up.)o Check the pressure of

tire each time you chec

sure of other tires.

o Never overload your v

especially careful aboui if i

!WARNING:

NOTE:

o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling and

reduced fuel economy. Wheel de-

formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the proper

levels. If a tire frequently needs

refilling, have it checked by your

Hyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from road

hazards.

Page 257: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 257/282

! WARNING:

Overinflation or underinflation can

reduce the tire life, adversely affect

vehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult in

loss of vehicle control and potential

injury.

ing if you equip your v

a luggage rack.

o Worn, old tires can c

dents. If your tread is b

or if your tires have

aged, replace them.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

6

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-

sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gauge. Besure to put the valve caps back on the

valve stems They help prevent leaks

Federal law requires tire mers to place standardized on the sidewall of all tires

mation identifies and de

I030B01MC-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELI

1

2

1

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-

SURE

Check your tires once a month or

more. Also, check the tire pressure ofthe spare tire.

How to Check 

Use a good quality gauge to check tire

pressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means your

vehicle has been sitting for at least

Page 258: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 258/282

valve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture. mation identifies and defundamental characteristicand also provides the tire idnumber (TIN) for safety sttification. The TIN can b

identify the tire in case of

vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

1. Manufacturer or Brand name

o Manufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size (example: P175/70R14)

o The "P" indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (175): Thisnumber gives the width in millime-

ters of the tire from sidewall edgeto sidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (70): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height to

width

o T: Speed Rating. The speed rat-ing denotes the speed at which atire is designed to be driven forextended periods of time. The

ratings range from "A" to "Z" (98to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "De-

partment of Transportation". Thesymbol can be placed above, be-low or to the left or right of the TireIdentification Number. Indicatestire is in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation

o Four numbers represeand year the tire waexample, the nummeans the 31st week

4. Tire ply composition rial

The number of layers rubbercoated fabric in tmanufacturers also muthe materials in the tire

clude steel, nylon, polothers. The letter "R" mply construction; the lettediagonal or bias ply cand the letter "B" means

ply construction

Page 259: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 259/282

width.o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (14): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two (or three) digit number (84):

This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port.

Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's

identification marko 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

ply construction.5. Maximum permissibl

pressure

This number is the greaof air pressure that shouthe tire. Do not exceed

mum permissible inflatioRefer to the Tire and Lomation label for recommtion pressure.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-

TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside

the tire pressing outward on the tire.Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-

cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords

that is located between the plies andh d C d b d f

Cold Tire Pressure: Theair pressure in a tire, mpounds per square inckilopascals (kPa) before

built up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This meansof a motor vehicle with stoptional equipment includinmum capacity of fuel, oil abut without passengers an

DOT Markings: A code mthe sidewall of a tire signifytire is in compliance witDepartment of Transportavehicle safety standards

code includes the Tire Id

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG):

Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. Formore information, see Uniform Tire

Quality Grading on page 8 15

Page 260: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 260/282

that is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead:  The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire:  A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

code includes the Tire IdNumber (TIN), an alphanumnator which can also idenmanufacturer, production pand date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle We

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Wing for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Wefor the rear axle.

Quality Grading on page 8-15.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

Intended Outboard Sidewall:  Theside of an asymmetrical tire, that mustalways face outward when mounted ona vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure:  The

maximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-

sible inflation pressure for that tireM i L d d V hi l W i h

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same

moldings on the other sidewall of thetire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:V hi l f t ' d d

Rim:  A metal support forupon which the tire beads Sidewall:  The portion oftween the tread and the b

Speed Rating: An alphanuassigned to a tire indicatinmum speed at which a tirate.Traction: The friction betwand the road surface. The

grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tireinto contact with the roadTreadwear Indicators: Nasometimes called "wear

show across the tread ofl 2/32 i h f d

Page 261: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 261/282

sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-

ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown onthe tire placard.Radial Ply tire:  A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

show across the tread of only 2/32 inch of tread remUTQGS: Uniform Tire QuaStandards, a tire informatthat provides consumers for a tire's traction, tempe

treadwear. Ratings are detire manufacturers using gtesting procedures. The molded into the sidewall o

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

10

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car withthey should be the sam

have the same load capaoriginal tires. Snow tiresinstalled on all four wheelspoor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 pmore air pressure than th

recommended for the standthe tire label on the driver'scenter pillar , or up to thepressure shown on the twhichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 7km/h) when your car is eq

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-

mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEA-SON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire sidewall. Snow tires have bettersnow traction than all season tires an

may be more appropriate in some areas.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

That load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanently

attached to a vehicle showing the origi-l i t ti i d

Page 262: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 262/282

Do not drive faster than 7km/h) when your car is eqsnow tires.

attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

!

!

I050A01MC-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be sure

that the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains when

they are no longer needed.

WARNING:

o If your vehicle is equipped with

P205/45R16 size tires, do not in-

stall tire chains. This may cause

o If you have noise caused bychains contacting the body, re-

tighten the chain to avoid contact

with the vehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, re-

tighten the chains after driving

0.3~0.6 miles.

o Don't use tire chains on a vehicleequipped with aluminium wheels.

If it is unavoidable, use wire typechains.

o Use wire chains less than 15 mmto prevent damage to the chain's

connection.

WARNING:

I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated emiles (12,000 km). If youtires are wearing uneven

rotations, have the car ch

Page 263: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 263/282

stall tire chains. This may causedamage to the vehicle (wheels,

suspension and body) by chainscontacting the body.

o When driving on roads coveredwith snow or ice, drive at less

than 20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &

plastic chains.

connection. rotations, have the car chHyundai dealer so the caucorrected.After rotating, adjust the tirand be sure to check the

torque.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

12

I090A04A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIR

The original tires on youtread wear indicators. Thetread wear indicators is sh

"TWI" or " " marks, etc

!WARNING:

o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.

o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handling

characteristics that could result

in death, serious injury, or prop-

erty damage.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on

your Hyundai were balanced beforethe car was delivered but may needbalancing again during the years youown the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted forrepair, it should be rebalanced before

being reinstalled on the car.

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you

Page 264: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 264/282

TWI or marks, etcwear indicators appear whdepth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mmshould be replaced when thas a solid bar across tw

grooves of the tread. Alwyour tires with those of tmended size. If you changthe new wheel's rim widthmust meet Hyundai speci

Tire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that are im-properly inflated or on slippery roadsurfaces. Tires should be replacedwhen tread wear indicators appear. To

reduce the possibility of losing control,slow down whenever there is rain,snow or ice on the road.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

!

!!WARNING:

To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accident

caused by tire failure or loss ofvehicle control:o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-

trol, and traction.o Do not drive your vehicle with too

little or too much pressure inyour tires. This can lead to un-even wear and tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mix

radial and bias-ply tires on theY l ll

I090B02JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflatwheel alignment helps to d

wear. If you find a tire ievenly, have your dealerwheel alignment.

When you have new tiremake sure they are balanc

increase vehicle ride comlife. Additionally, a tire shbe rebalanced if it is removwheel.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sspecifications may fit poorly and

result in damage to the vehicle orunusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.

o Tires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remaining tread,

it is recommended that tires tread,It is recommended that tires gen-erally be replaced after 6 years ofnormal service. Heat caused bynot climates or frequent high load-ing Conditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to followthis Warning can result in sud

WARNING:

WARNING:

Page 265: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 265/282

!p ysame car. You must replace alltires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.

o Using tires and wheel other thanthe recommended sizes could

cause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle con-trol, resulting in a serious acci-dent.

g g pthis Warning can result in sud-den tire failure, which could leadto a loss of control and an acci-dent involving serious injury ordeath.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overin

can cause poor handlvehicle control, and sfailure leading to accid

ries, and even deathcheck tires are propebefore driving. Refer 20 and 8-3 for propesures and further info

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

14

! WARNING:

I100A01MC-AAT

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLSI110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is ayour authorized Hyundai deaten for professional technic

simple enough for most minclined owners to understa

o Driving on tires with no or insuf-ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, andinjury and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soonas possible and should never beused for driving. Always check 

tire tread before driving your car.Refer to this page for further in-formation and tread limits.

Page 266: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 266/282

Your Hyundai is delivered with thefollowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack, Towing hook

D060B01MC-A

Page 267: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 267/282

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

16

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can

lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel

!WARNING:

The temperature grade f

is established for a tire therly inflated and not o

Excessive speed, underi

excessive loading, either

or in combination, can c

buildup and possible tir

Uniform Tire Quality Grad

ity grades can be found sidewall between the treaand the maximum section

For example:T d 200 T ti A

!

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under con-

trolled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

Page 268: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 268/282

ythan the minimum required by law.

Treadwear 200 Traction ATemperature A

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WA

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, NorthCarolina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A

Austell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkan-sas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mis-sissippi, Missouri, New Mexico, Okla-homa, Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-S O

Western Region: Alaska, HawCalifornia, ldaho, Montana, egon, Texas, Utah, Washing

Western Region

10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California(800) 633-5151

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designedand manufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all directionsin this Owner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings "NOTE","CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have

any questions regarding the operation ofyour vehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New

Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,Pennsylvanina Rhode Island Vermont

Page 269: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 269/282

braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia Drive

Aurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont,Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Page 270: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 270/282

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

Page 271: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 271/282

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

Tire Size

P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14, P195/55 R15

P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14

P205/45 R16

T115/70 D15

in. (mm)

4Door

3Door

Spare

US. gal

11.9Fuel tank capacity

Imp.gal

9.9

Inflat

30P

32P

60P

J010A02MC-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J020A01MC-AAT

POWER STEERING

J060A01A-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J030A02MC-AAT

TIRE

4 DOOR

168.5 (4280)

66.7 (1695)57.8 (1470) / 58 (1475)*

98.4 (2500)

57.8 (1470) / 58.4 (1485)*

57.4 (1460) / 58 (1475)*

Item

Overall length

Overall widthOverall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

3 DOOR

159.2 (4045)

TypeWheel free play

Rack and pinion0 1 18 in (0 30 mm)

* with P175/70R14 Tire

Page 272: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 272/282

Dual hydraulic with brake b

Ventilated discDrum

Cable operated on rear wh

Type

Front brake typeRear brake type

Parking brake

J050A02MC-AAT

BRAKE

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

0 ~ 1.18 in (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.59 in. (142 mm)

5.43 in. (138 mm)

Vane type

175 Tire only

Except 175 Tire

VEHICLE

ENGINE

SPECIFICATIONS

1.6 MPI

4-Cylinder in-line DOHC

3.01 x 3.42 in. (76.5 x 87 mm)

1,599

700 ± 100

BTDC 5° ± 5°

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

J070A02MC-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement (cc)

Idle Speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

Firing order

Page 273: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 273/282

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

PSF-3

DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]

LUBRICATION CHART

Item

Engine oil

Recommends

Transaxle Manual

Auto

Power steering

Brake fluid

Coolant Manual

J080A01MC-AAT

Q'ty (US.QTS)(Im

Drain and refill

Without oil filter : 3.17

With oil filter : 3.48 (2

2 (1.67, 1.9)

6.44 (5.3, 6.1)

As required

As required

5.49 (4.5, 5.2)

Page 274: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 274/282

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiatorTransaxle

Automatic

Transaxle

5.49 (4.5, 5.2)

5.60 (4.6, 5.3)

1

INDEX

Page 275: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 275/282

Page 276: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 276/282

Page 277: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 277/282

Page 278: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 278/282

Page 279: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 279/282

10 INDEX

6

Spare tire ........................................................................ 3-10

Terminology and definitions ............................................. 8-8

Traction ........................................................................... 8-12

Towing

A trailer (or vehicle) ........................................................ 2-20

Emergency ...................................................................... 3-18If your vehicle must be towed ........................................ 3-16

Transaxle

Automatic .......................................................................... 2-9

Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-11

Manual .............................................................................. 2-6

Manual transaxle oil checking ....................................... 6-11Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-73

Trip Odometer .................................................................... 1-72

Trunk Lid/Tail Gate ............................................................. 1-97

Remote trunk lid release ................................................ 1-98

V

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2

V hi l L d Li i

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ...................

Adjustable Intermittent wiper operation ..............

Mist wiper operation ............................................

Rear window wiper and washer .........................

Washer reservoir .................................................

Windshield washer operation .............................Windshield Wiper Blades .......................................

Page 280: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 280/282

Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-20

Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1

W

Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-64Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-15

Windows ............................................................................. 1-11

Window lock .................................................................... 1-12

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next own

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

Page 281: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 281/282

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

FUEL:

UNLEADED gasoline only

Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Original, US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 11.9 (9.9, 45)

TIRE PRESSURE:

See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:

See pages 8-3 through 8-14.

HOOD RELEASE:

Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:

API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel

ffi i t il U SAE 5W 20 5W 30 10W 30 if l t

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-

should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differe

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:

Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the se

through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Th

level of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GEN

SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other bra

the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co

QUICK INDEX

o Car will not start ...........................................................

o Flat tire ..........................................................................

o Warning light/chime comes on .....................................

o Engine overheats ...........................................................

o Towing of your vehicle .................................................

o Starting the engine .........................................................o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ................

S h d l d i t

Page 282: 2008 Accent Manual

8/12/2019 2008 Accent Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2008-accent-manual 282/282

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAY. 30,

Publication No.: A1

Printed in Korea

efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal tempera-

tures are above 0°F (-18°C). For other viscosity recommendations,

see page 6-4 or 9-4.

o Scheduled maintenance ..................................................

o Reporting safety defects ...............................................